Ge Cti Install

Technical Publications
Direction 2152926100
Revision 8
GE Medical Systems HISPEED CT/i GENERAL SERVICE SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
CopyrightE 1998 by General Electric Company
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8
HISPEED CT/i GENERAL SERVICE SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL DIRECTION 2152926100
NOTES
ii
THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY. IF A CUSTOMERS SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMERS RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TRANSLATION SERVICES. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD. FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, MECHANICAL OR OTHER HAZARDS.
WARNING
CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE NEST DISPONIBLE QUEN ANGLAIS. SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE LANGUE QUE LANGLAIS, CEST AU CLIENT QUIL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE TRADUIRE. NE PAS TENTER DINTERVENTION SUR LES QUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE MANUEL SERVICE NA PAS T CONSULT ET COMPRIS. LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRANER CHEZ LE TECHNICIEN, LOPRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES DES DANGERS LECTRIQUES, MCANIQUES OU AUTRES.
AVERTISSEMENT
WARNUNG

DIESES KUNDENDIENSTHANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER SPRACHE. FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENTIGT, IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE BERSETZUNG ZU SORGEN. VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT, DAS GERT ZU REPARIEREN, BEVOR DIESES KUNDENDIENSTHANDBUCH NICHT ZU RATE GEZOGEN UND VERSTANDEN WURDE. WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE GEFAHREN KOMMEN.
ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SLO EXISTE EN INGLS. SI ALGN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEMS SOLICITA UN IDIOMA QUE NO SEA EL INGLS, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE OFRECER UN SERVICIO DE TRADUCCIN. NO SE DEBER DAR SERVICIO TCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO. LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELCTRICAS, MECNICAS O DE OTRA NATURALEZA.
AVISO
iii
ATENO
ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA S SE ENCONTRA DISPONVEL EM INGLS. SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIO DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA, QUE NO A GEMS, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, DA RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIOS DE TRADUO. NO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA. E
O NO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANA DO TCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A CHOQUES ELTRICOS, MECNICOS OU OUTROS.
AVVERTENZA
IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE DISPONIBILE SOLTANTO IN INGLESE. SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEMS RICHIEDE IL MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE TENUTO A PROVVEDERE DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE. SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELLAPPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL CONTENUTO. NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALLADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE, ALLUTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER FOLGORAZIONE ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.
iv
IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION

X-ray equipment if not properly used may cause injury. Accordingly, the instructions herein contained should be thoroughly read and understood by everyone who will use the equipment before you attempt to place this equipment in operation. The General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, will be glad to assist and cooperate in placing this equipment in use. Although this apparatus incorporates a high degree of protection against x-radiation other than the useful beam, no practical design of equipment can provide complete protection. Nor can any practical design compel the operator to take adequate precautions to prevent the possibility of any persons carelessly exposing themselves or others to radiation. It is important that everyone having anything to do with x-radiation be properly trained and fully acquainted with the recommendations of the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements as published in NCRP Reports available from NCRP Publications, 7910 Woodmont Avenue, Room 1016, Bethesda, Maryland 20814, and of the International Commission on Radiation Protection, and take adequate steps to protect against injury. The equipment is sold with the understanding that the General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, its agents, and representatives have no responsibility for injury or damage which may result from improper use of the equipment. Various protective material and devices are available. It is urged that such materials or devices be used.
CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT

All electrical installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. In addition, electrical feeds into the Power Distribution Unit shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing shall be performed by qualified GE Medical personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are highly sophisticated, and special engineering competence is required. In performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GEs electrical work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable electrical codes. The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE field engineers, personnel of third-party service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.
DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent, have notation damage in shipment written on all copies of the freight or express bill before delivery is accepted or signed for by a General Electric representative or a hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day period. Call Traffic and Transportation, Milwaukee, WI (414) 8273449 / 8*2853449 immediately after damage is found. At this time be ready to supply name of carrier, delivery date, consignee name, freight or express bill number, item damaged and extent of damage. Complete instructions regarding claim procedure are found in Section S of the Policy & Procedure Bulletins.
6/17/94
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 NOTES
vi
REVISION HISTORY
REV 1 2 3 DATE REASON FOR CHANGE 13 February 1996 Initial Release June 1996 Content Update August, 1996 Chapter 13 removed, see System Service Manual(s) for LFC and System Reconfiguration information. Some fonts and charcters changed for more reliable electronic representation. June 1997 CT/i 3.6 and CQA 966105, modified Alignments chapter, replaced Retest Matrix chapter (chapter 12) with Replacement Test and Verification chapter, corrected FORM F4879. May, 1997 CT/i 3.5 May, 1997 CT/i 3.6 October, 1997 CT/i 4.0 & Performix Tube modifications. This document supports both HSA Tube & Performix Tube Installations. Miscellaneous corrections to support current production. 18 May, 1998 Manual changed to support NexGen (Octane) Computer Configuration. Removed: References to touch montor (no longer option on Octane) in Chapter 1 Added: Installation drawing for screwless heyboard table top in Chapter 2 Added: Octane Jack Identifiers, Octane Console Power Diagram, Back view Octane Computer, Data Central Box and EMC/NonEMC Interconnect Diagrams to Chapter 2.
4 5 6 7 8
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

PAGE NUMBER Cover to Blank (i to ii) iii to vi vii to xviii 11 to 126 21 to 236 31 to 310 REVISION NUMBER 8 8 61 to 620 8 71 to 710 8 81 to 836 8 91 to 928 8 8 8 8 8 Blank to Rear PAGE NUMBER 41 to 48 51 to 518 REVISION NUMBER 8 8 PAGE NUMBER 101 to 1048 111 to 1114 REVISION NUMBER 8 8
vii
INTRODUCTION This book has 11 Chapters which contain the necessary information to correctly install the your system in a systematic way. It includes hardware positioning and anchoring information, cable connections and checks, subsystem integration, functional checks and system tests. Every chapters present the tasks in the order that they must occur. Each chapter has all the information necessary to complete its intended task intended and validate results. Tasks are organized in the order by which they must occur. Please see follow each chapter through to completion before proceeding to the next. Missing a step could severely impact the effectiveness and quality of the installation, as well as and your own efficiently. Plan ahead, to work more effectively and efficiently. Review this installation manual before beginning. For example, if your system has additional options, we would recommend running the option cables when initially cabling your system and leaving option(s) unhooked until the system has passed the initial image series. Note: If you require assistance, or have any questions on any portion of the installation or integration procedure, please contact your local GE Service provider. START
Field Site Preparation (See Preinstallation Manual Installation And Power Checks)
Integration and Image Series
Customer Turnover
viii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 POSITION SUBSYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11 Install Table/Gantry Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Floor and Room Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 PreInstallation Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Installation Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Required Common Tools and Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Procedure to Install and Level Table/Gantry Without Floor Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Establish the Room Layout: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Position the Gantry: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Level the Gantry: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Position the Table: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Level the Table: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Tighten the Lock Rings: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Drill the Remaining Anchor Holes: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Redundant Anchor Hole Locations: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Install the Anchors: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Assemble and Install the Gantry Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Install Table Footswitch Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Position the Power Distribution Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Install Gantry/Table Pushbutton Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Gantry Base Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Install Operator Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Remove Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Attach Stabilizer Pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Attach Keyboard Table Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Attach Keyboard Table Top and Position Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Monitor Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Seismic Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
12 12 12 13 13 13 14 14 15 15 17 18 18 19 110 110 116 117 117 117 118 118 118 119 119 121 122 123
CHAPTER 2 Install Power, Ground and Interconnect Cables . . . . . . . . . . . .

21 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 System Power and Ground Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Electrical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 System Component Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Cable Color Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Console Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Console Power (Indigo Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Console Power (Octane Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Computer Carrier (Indigo Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Computer Carrier (Octane Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Central Data Box (Octane Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Specialix option (Non Octane Systems Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Back Bulkhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Keyboard and Trackball Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
22 23 23 23 24 25 25 26 27 28 29 210 211 212
ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS continued

269 Display Monitor, Color option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2610 RX Display Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Gantry Panels and Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 EMC Gantry Power Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 NonEMC Gantry Power Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Table and A7 Panel Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 PDU 2133533 Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 PDU 2133533 A2 Panel HVDC Supply Output Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 PDU 2133533 A1 Panel Axial Servo Amp Panel Output Connections . . . . . . . . . . 293 PDU 2133533 A3 Panel Circuit Breaker Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 PDU 2133533 A3 Panel Input Power Panel Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 PDU 2133533 A4 Panel Connector Bulkhead (Bottom View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 System Ground Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Contractor Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 226 227
CHAPTER 3 System Continuity and Ground Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Use Section 31 with nonEMC systems that have PDU part number 2133533.
31 NonEMC systems with PDU part number 2133533 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3111 Required Tools: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Site Ground Impedance Check (NonEMC systems w/PDU part number 2133533) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3121 Ground Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Site Ground Current Check (NonEMC systems w/ PDU part number 2133533) . . 3131 Required Tools: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3132 Check Ground Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 System Continuity & Gnd Checks (NonEMC w/ PDU part number 2133533) . . . . . 315 Site Ground Continuity Check (NonEMC w/ PDU part number 2133533) . . . . . . . .
31
32 32 32 32 32 33 33 33 34 35
Use Section 32 with EMC systems that have PDU part number 2133533.
32 EMC systems with PDU part number 2133533 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3211 Required Tools: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Site Ground Impedance Check (EMC systems w/ PDU part number 2133533) . . . . 3221 Ground Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Site Ground Current Check (EMC systems w/ PDU part number 2133533) . . . . . . . 3231 Required Tools: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3232 Check Ground Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 System Continuity & Gnd Checks (EMC systems w/PDU part number 2133533) . . 325 Site Ground Continuity Check (EMC systems with PDU part number 2133533) . . . 36 36 36 36 36 37 37 37 38 39
CHAPTER 4 PDU Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

41 Systems with PDU 2133533 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 PDU 2133533 Area Designators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
41 41 41 42

414 4141 4142 4143 4144 4145 415 416 4161 417 418 419 Initial Configuration for Systems with PDU 2133533 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relay Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware and Connection Check (Field Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suite Emergency Stop Checks Systems with PDU 2133533 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Transformer Settings Systems with PDU 2133533 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Input Conditions: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Power Up Systems with PDU 2133533 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gantry Display TestSystems with PDU 2133533 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remaining Power Switches Systems with PDU 2133533 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 44 44 44 44 44 45 45 45 46 47 47
CHAPTER 5 Computer Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

51 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Requirements/Assumptions: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Power Up Stop for Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Keyboard Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 NonEnglish Keyboard Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561 Start System Stop the CT/i AutoStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Touch Calibration (Hardware Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Monitor Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581 Monitor Manual Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582 Factory PreSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583 Center the Raster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584 Set Monitor Color Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585 Monitor Brightness and Contrast Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586 Adjust the Raster Horizontal and Vertical Size and Tilt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587 Adjust Pincushion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588 Adjust Convergence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 Default Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510 Set Timezone and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 Change Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5111 New Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 Reconfig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5121 reconfig the OC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5122 reconfig the SBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 Restore System State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 Install Options (Customer Purchased Option(s)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 Verify Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 Adjust Intercom Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5161 Autovoice and CBT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51
52 52 52 52 52 53 53 54 55 56 56 56 56 56 57 57 57 57 57 58 58 58 59 59 59 510 511 512 512 513
xi

APPENDIX 5A CAMERA SETUP TIPS From Field Service Tips, Rev 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 5B touch screen defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 518
CHAPTER 6 Table/Gantry Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

61 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Axial Enable and Gantry Door Switch Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Verify the OBC CTVRC or HEMRC Control Board JP1 Jumper Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Test HVDC (550) Enable Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651 Verify/Perform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Collimator Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661 Data Entry Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662 Verify/Perform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Check Alignment Light Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Internal Axial Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672 External Axial to Internal Axial Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673 Coronal Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Laser Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Alignment Light Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610 Intercom Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611 Tilt Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 Elevation Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613 Cradle Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614 Interference Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 Emergency Stop Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 6A Axial Encoder Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 6B Axial Brake Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
61
62 62 62 63 63 65 66 67 68 68 68 69 69 69 611 611 612 613 615 617 619 620 620
CHAPTER 7 DAS Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

71 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711 Failure Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712 Special Handling Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7121 Antistatic Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7122 Cleanliness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713 Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Verify XRay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721 XRay Verification Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722 Advanced Features Channel, View and Box Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Check System Microphonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 7A HPDAS OFFSET AND NOISE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71
71 71 71 72 72 72 72 74 75 76 710
xii

CHAPTER 8 Generator Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
81 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 mA Meter Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 New Tube Seed Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Calibrate HV Tank Feedback Resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861 Install HV Divider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862 Setup Instrumentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863 Calibrate the Cathode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864 Calibrate the Anode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Measure Total kV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Verify kV Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881 Remove the external HV Divider: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Auto mA Cal/XRay On Light Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810 KV Rise and Fall Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8101 Measure Rise Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8102 Measure Fall Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811 Verify Internal Scan Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812 Site Ground Leakage Current Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 8A Tube Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 8B Tube heat Soak and Seasoning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 8C Verify ma and kv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
81
82 83 84 85 87 88 88 89 89 811 813 814 815 816 817 818 820 821 823 826 829 835
CHAPTER 9 System Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

91 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Gantry Geometry Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Site Ground Current Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Plane of Rotation (POR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 XRay Beam on Detector Window (BOW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Isocenter (ISO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971 Acquire ISO Air scans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972 Acquire ISO pin scans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973 Analyze ISO scans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 974 Adjust Isocenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 CBF (Center Body Filter) and SAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981 CBF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982 ADJUSTING CBF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983 SAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 9A Radial Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
91
93 93 93 94 95 99 914 914 915 915 918 920 920 921 922 923
xiii

CHAPTER 10 System Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
101 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Calibration Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021 Prepare the QA Phantom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022 Calibration Process Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023 Check for the Presence of Cal Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024 Calibration Process A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025 Calibration Process B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 How to Scan with Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Adjust CT Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 How to Analyze Calibration data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 System Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1062 Table/Gantry Alignment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063 Tomographic Plane Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064 Exposure Time Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065 System Scanning Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Image Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071 Scan Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072 Data Recording: Means and Standard Deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073 Image Series Term Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074 Image Series for CT/i System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10741 Analyze Image Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075 QA Image Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10751 Analyze QA Image Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 IMAGE DATA SHEET 48cm/L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 IMAGE DATA SHEET QA Phantom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010 IMAGE DATA SHEET QA Phantom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011 IMAGE DATA SHEET QA Phantom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012 IMAGE DATA SHEET QA Phantom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013 IMAGE DATA SHEET QA Phantom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014 Save System State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015 Tube Heat Soak and Seasoning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 10A Install Gantry Base Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 10B Thermal Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 10C Increment Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 10D Streak Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 10E Artifact Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 10F QCal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 10G Calibrate Crosstalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 10H Generate Alpha Vector CaL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 10I Image Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
101
102 103 103 103 103 105 107 108 1010 1011 1013 1013 1013 1015 1016 1017 1018 1018 1018 1019 1019 1019 1020 1020 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1032 1033 1034 1035 1042 1044 1045 1046
CHAPTER 11 F4879X
111
..............................................
111
111
Form F4879X (Total Eleven pages) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiv
TABLE OF ILLUSTRATIONS
ILLUSTRATION 11 Installation Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 12 Leveling Pad and Anchor Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 13 Gantry/Table Level Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 14 Redundant Anchor Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 15 Anchor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 16 Adjust Leveling pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 17 Install Table Footswitch Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 18 Operator console Front Cover ................................................. ILLUSTRATION 19 Console Stabilizer Pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 110 Attach keyboard to Table Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 111 Attach keyboard to Table Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 112 console Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 113 Console Monitor Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 114 Seismic Mounting Hole Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 115 Gantry Front Shroud Hinge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 116 Hinge pin detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 117 rear cover hinge pin ......................................................... ............................................. ILLUSTRATION 21 Excess cable storage configuration 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 119 120 121 122 123 125 125 126 22 25 26 27 28 29 210 211 212 213 214 215 215 216 217 218 218 219 220
ILLUSTRATION 22 Power Detail (Indigo Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 23 Power Detail (Octane Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 24 Computer Carrier Detail (Indigo Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 25 Computer Carrier Detail (Octane Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 26 Computer (Octane Systems) Central Data Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 27 Specialix Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 28 Back Bulkhead Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 29 Keyboard/Trackball Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 210 Display Monitor Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 211 Rx Monitor Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 212 Gantry ................................................................... ILLUSTRATION 213 A1A5 Panel, detail a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 214 EMC Gantry Detail B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 215 NonEMC Detail B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 216 HiSpeed Advantage Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 217 A2A7 Panel Detail A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 218 PDU Area Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 219 HVDC Supply OUtput Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xv
TABLE OF ILLUSTRATIONS continued

ILLUSTRATION 220 Axial Servo Amp Panel Output Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 221 A3 Panel ................................................................... ILLUSTRATION 222 Input Power Panel Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 223 A4 Panel (Bottom View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 224 XRay Warning Light and Door Interlock Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 225 System Ground Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 226 Nonemc HiSpeed CT/i Interconnect Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 227 EMC HiSpeed CT/i Interconnect Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 228 Nonemc HiSpeed CT/i Interconnect Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 229 emc HiSpeed CT/i Interconnect Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 230 emc HiSpeed CT/i Interconnect Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 231 emc HiSpeed CT/i Interconnect Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 41 PDU 2133533 Area Designators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 42 PDU 2133533 tap positions (Rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 43 PDU 2133533 CONTROL BOARD (A6 Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 51 Monitor Setup Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 61 laser warning and precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 62 Measure elevation distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 63 CRADLE CHARACTERIZATION PIN LOCATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 71 display Channel and Data Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 72 Analysis softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 81 Chapter Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 82 Axial Drive Status and Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 83 Bleeder Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 84 Rise Time Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 85 Fall Time Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 86 Tube Usage Initial Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 91 System Alignment overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 92 Gantry Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 93 Plane of Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 94 Position Film for Beam On Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 95 detail of mounting/adjustment hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 96 RADIAL ALIGNMENT TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 97 Rotational Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 98 Mounting/adjustment Hardware (detail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 101 System Test Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 102 Cal List/Select Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 103 Detailed Calibration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 104 Detailed Calibration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 222 223 224 225 226 228 230 232 233 235 237 42 43 43 55 610 614 616 74 75 82 84 88 819 820 827 92 93 96 912 913 924 926 927 102 104 105 107
xvi
TABLE OF ILLUSTRATIONS continued

ILLUSTRATION 105 Protocol List (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 106 Adjust Window Width/Level with Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 107 Reposition ROI with Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILLUSTRATION 108 Base Cover Installation Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 1021 1021 1031
xvii
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE 21 System Component Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE 22 Cable Color Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE 23 Jack Identifiers (Indigo Consoles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE 24 Jack Identifiers (Octane Consoles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE 25 System Ground connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE 26 Console (2169455) Cables Interconnect List (OCTANE SystemS ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE 27 Console (2169455) Power and Ground (OCTANE SystemS ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE 41 PDU 2133533 Line Tap Connection Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE 51 Video output (measured into 75W at bnc output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE 52 Pixel Clock Output ................................................................... TABLE 53 VIDEO TIMING CHARACTERISTIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE 54 VIDEO DISPLAY FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE 55 HOST COMMUNICATIONS/CONTROL SERIAL PORT (Analog Interface Only*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE 56 CT/i DISPLAY MONITOR VIDEO CHARACTERISTICS & TIMING PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE 71 Specification Limits for DC Offsets and Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE 81 kV Rise and Fall Time Record Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE 82 Heat Soak and Stability Parameters MX_165_CT_l SCAN TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE 83 HEAT SOAK AND STABILITY PARAMETERS TABLE 101 SMALL CAL N # TABLE 102 LARGE CAL N # MX_200_CT SCAN TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................................................................... ................................................................... 23 24 24 24 226 236 238 46 515 515 516 516 516 517 710 818 832 833 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1019 1020 1032 1033 1034
TABLE 103 Adjust CT Number Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE 104 N Number Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE 105 Perpendicular Alignment Scan Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE 106 Tomographic Plane Indication Scan Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE 107 Exposure Time Accuracy Scan Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE 108 System Scanning Test scan parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE 109 CT/i Image Series Scan Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE 1010 Image Series QA scan Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE 1011 Thermal Test Scan Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE 1012 Cradle Incrementation Specs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE 1013 Streak Test Scan Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xviii
CHAPTER 1 POSITION SUBSYSTEMS
Usage Note: CT Service Engineering constantly updates this manual to match product improvements. Use the Installation book that arrives with the system to install it. Any other revisions of this manual may not exactly match this system installation. Use other revisions of this Installation manual for reference purposes only.
CHAPTER 1 CONTENTS
11 Install Table/Gantry Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Floor and Room Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 PreInstallation Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Installation Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Required Common Tools and Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Procedure to Install and Level Table/Gantry Without Floor Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Establish the Room Layout: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Position the Gantry: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Level the Gantry: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Position the Table: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Level the Table: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Tighten the Lock Rings: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Drill the Remaining Anchor Holes: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Redundant Anchor Hole Locations: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Install the Anchors: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Assemble and Install the Gantry Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Install Table Footswitch Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Position the Power Distribution Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Install Gantry/Table Pushbutton Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Gantry Base Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Install Operator Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Remove Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Attach Stabilizer Pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Attach Keyboard Table Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Attach Keyboard Table Top and Position Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Monitor Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Seismic Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 12 12 13 13 13 14 14 15 15 17 18 18 19 110 110 116 117 117 117 118 118 118 119 119 121 122 123
11
11
Install Table/Gantry Introduction This chapter describes how to mount, position and level all HiSpeed Advantage Subsystems. Note: FIELD: Before you start the installation, make sure the site preparation complies with the Preinstallation manual. If possible, remove the cable box(s) from the truck, first. Someone can then run the cables per Chapter 2 of this manual, while others unload the subsystems from the truck and/or move them to the CT room.
111
Floor and Room Preparation The support areas of the main table and gantry must rest on solid concrete, or other basic flooring. Resilient tile or carpeting may slowly yield over a period of time, and disturb the alignment of the table to the gantry. No part of the floor surface within the table, gantry, or the two interface areas between table and gantry, should be higher than the support areas for the table and gantry. The floor structure must withstand the occupied weight of table and gantry, as well as the individual contact area loading of these components The method and placement of anchors, or through bolts, must not reduce the structural strength of the floor. Note: If you have to remove the gantry covers in order to move the gantry into the room, the Appendix on page 124 describes the cover removal procedure.
112
Overview The following procedure provides detailed instructions to position, level and anchor a HiSpeed Advantage gantry and table with a floor mounting system designed for installation without baseplates. HSA CT systems use adjustable leveling pads to support the gantry and table. The gantry has four leveling pads, and the table has five leveling pads. First, use a roomlayout template to determine the position of the gantry and table. Move the gantry into position, then position the table relative to the gantry, with three alignment bars. Finally, level and anchor the system. Use the template to position the system; use the gantry and table to locate and drill the anchor holes. Drill the anchor holes with the system in place. Refer to Illustration 11 and Illustration 12 for an example of this new procedure. This HSA system installation procedure requires the items listed in section 114 and 115.
12
113
PreInstallation Template Locate the preinstallation template, in the cardboard tube attached to the console wood support. Use the roomlayout paper template, P/N 2106475 (in two pieces), during site planning. The template shows the location of the gantry and table, along with the required operating and service clearances. Although the template shows the locations of the anchor holes (both primary and redundant) for floor structure considerations, use the templates to locate and drill the first gantry anchor hole ONLY.
114
Installation Tool Kit The installation personnel provide the installation tool kit, P/N 2110953. The took kit contains the following special tools (See Illustration 11): Guide Pin Bolt, P/N 2106495: use to position the gantry over its first anchor hole. Long Alignment Bar (in two pieces), P/N 2106369: use to position the table, relative to the gantry. Two Short Alignment Bars, P/N 2106368: use to position the table, relative to the gantry. Adjuster Tool, P/N 2107863: use to turn the adjusters, which level the system. Drill Bushing, P/N 2106205: use to center and guide the bit when drilling the anchor holes. Vacuum Attachment (funnel), P/N 2110944: use to vacuum debris out of the anchor holes. Spanner Wrench, P/N 2110003: if necessary, use to turn the adjusters after you anchor the system
115
Required Common Tools and Supplies Masking Tape Extension Cord Shop Vacuum Cleaner Hammer drill 1/ or 13mm masonry bit, min. 8 long 2 Hammer Large straight blade screwdriver 4 foot level 1/ Allen wrench 8 9 torpedo level
1/ drive socket wrench 2 1/ drive 3 long extension 2 1/ drive 6 long extension 2 9/ socket 16 3/ deep well socket 4 11/8 socket 11/2 socket 1/ drive torque wrench: 2
0100 Nm (0100 ftlbs)
13
12 121
Procedure to Install and Level Table/Gantry Without Floor Plates Establish the Room Layout: 1. When you establish the room layout, make sure all the operating and service clearances shown on the templates exist. Locate the anchor holes, and make sure they clear structural interference in the floor. Clean the area, remove carpet/tile flooring as shown on the templates, and remove any old baseplates. Free the mounting surface of material, which may interfere with the positioning and leveling of the system. 2. Lay out the two paper templates. a. Start with the Gantry template; if necessary, align it with any existing cable trough. b. Tape the template to the floor. c. Note: Place the table template over top the Gantry template; align the scan and table centerlines, and tape the table template to the floor.
Before you drill the First Gantry Anchor Hole: Make sure you have the appropriate hospital personnel approve the location of the table/gantry before you start to drill any anchor holes. 3. Anchor the front left corner of the gantry. (Location #1) If something in the floor, such as the position of reinforcement rods in the concrete, interferes with this anchor hole position, shift the Gantry (and templates) to another location.
4. Drill one 13mm (1/2) diameter, 110 mm (4 3/8) deep, hole at the location shown on the gantry template. Important: Drill the hole perpendicular to the floor. While one person drills the hole, position a second person to watch the relationship between the drill bit and floor. Make sure the bit remains absolutely perpendicular to the floor throughout the drilling operation. Every 15 or 20 seconds, stop the drill, and clear the hole of debris to prevent binding of the drill bit.
5. Vacuum all debris from the inside of the hole: a. Place the funnel tip inside the hole; place the vacuum hose in the funnel. b. When you finish clearing the anchor hole, vacuum the debris from the surrounding area.
14
122
Position the Gantry: 1. Remove all the transportation packaging, except dollies, from the gantry. 2. Locate and remove the adjuster shipping bolt from the left front corner of the gantry base 3. Replace the adjuster shipping bolt with the guide pin bolt, which also threads into the leveling pad. 4. Wheel the Gantry over the template, and position the guide pin over the hole. a. Locate the remaining leveling pads, and position them against the base of the gantry. (See Illustration 16) b. Use the dollies to evenly lower the gantry, until the guide pin extends into the hole, and the leveling pads rest approximately 3 mm above the floor. c. If necessary, use the guide pin and hole as a pivot, and carefully rotate the gantry into its correct position over the templates.
5. Remove the paper templates from the floor, and discard. 6. Loosen adjuster shipping bolts and locking rings one turn before you lower the gantry to the floor. Loosen the locking rings and shipping bolts so you can fine tune the leveling pads to compensate for slight variations in the floor surface.
7. Gently lower the gantry, until it rests on the floor. 8. Remove the dollies from the Gantry. 9. Remove the guide pin bolt from the left front adjuster. 10. Remove the three remaining adjuster shipping bolts. 123 Level the Gantry: 1. Remember: Wipe the leveling surfaces clean before you level the gantry. 2. Check the accuracy of the levels: a. Place the level on a flat surface. b. Observe the bubbles specific location within the glass cylinder. c. Rotate the level 180_ (pivot on the center of the level, to maintain the same mounting surface) and check the bubble. Level Ok to use: If the bubble comes to rest in the same location within the glass cylinder, you may use the level. Unacceptable Level: If the bubble comes to rest in a different location within the glass cylinder, replace or adjust the level.
3. Loosen all the adjuster lock rings: a. Place the screwdriver at an angle, in the slot of the lock ring. b. Strike the screwdriver with a hammer, in the direction to loosen the lock ring.
15
4. Level the gantry: a. Because the leveling pads rest against the bottom of the base, you have to raise the gantry from its lowest possible height to level it. IF you positioned the gantry in a valley on the floor, you may have to raise the gantry to clear that depression, in order to correctly level the table after you install it.
b. Systematically rotate through the three gantry level locations, Level Location A, Level Location B, and Level Location C. (See Illustration 13) c. Turn each adjuster a maximum of 1 turn at a time. Use a 9 torpedo level, and adjuster #1 and #2, to level Location A. Use a 4 level, and adjuster #3 and #4, to level Location B. Use a 4 level, and adjust #1/#2, and #3/#4 to level Location C. Each location has two machined extensions welded to the base, to accommodate the 4 level. Make sure the level sits flat on the machined portion of the extensions, without riding up onto the neighboring fillets or welds.
Adjust the gantry leveling pads until you center the bubble on all three Level Locations at the same time. Use the adjusters to level the gantry. Use the adjuster tool, 11/8 socket and the 1/2 drive socket wrench to turn each adjuster. Use the mark on top of the adjuster to aid in incrementing the adjusters rotation.
d. Each of the four adjusters must carry a portion of the gantry weight. To prevent a twisted base frame and/or rocking during normal operation, do NOT leave unloaded or floating adjusters.
16
124
Position the Table: 1. Remove all the transportation packaging, except dollies, from the table. 2. Wheel the table into its approximate position, relative to the gantry. a. Locate the table leveling pads, and position them against the base of the gantry. (See Illustration 16) b. Use the dollies to evenly lower the table, until the leveling pads rest approximately 3 mm above the floor. 3. Loosen adjuster shipping bolts and locking rings one turn before you lower the table to the floor. Loosen the locking rings and shipping bolts so you can fine tune the leveling pads to compensate for slight variations in the floor surface.
4. Remove the table left and right upper side covers. 5. Remove the four side panels; disconnect the ground straps at the zchannel. 6. Remove the table base cover center support bar. 7. Assemble two halves of the long alignment bar, #3: a. Insert the pin, and rotate the handle to tighten the joint. If the joint remains loose, tighten the tip of the expanding pin to increase its diameter, and try again.
b. Check the serial number on both halves of the alignment bar; make sure the serial number match. 8. The short alignment bars, #1 and #2, are identical and interchangeable. 9. Refer to Illustration 12: a. Install the short alignment bars first. b. Pivot the far end of the table until the long alignment bar fits into place. c. Adjust the position of the table, until the three alignment bars fit into the 3/4 alignment holes in the gantry base, and the 1/2 alignment holes in the table base.
d. Fully seat all three bars on their mating surfaces. 10. After you install the alignment bars, lower the table to the floor, and remove the transportation dollies. a. Temporarily remove alignment bar #1, to remove the front table dolly. b. Replace alignment bar #1 after you remove the front dolly. 11. Remove the five adjuster shipping bolts, and loosen the lock rings. CAUTION
Take extreme care to prevent damage to the ETC and CPU PWAs.
17
125
Level the Table: 1. Remember: Wipe the leveling surfaces clean before you level the table. 2. Loosen and unload the Level Location #5 and Level Location #6 adjusters. 3. Use the 4 level at all three table leveling locations. Place the level on the machined surfaces of the alignment bars. Do NOT rest the level on the radiused surface on alignment bar #3.
4. Because the leveling pads rest against the bottom of the base, you have to raise the table from its lowest possible height to level it. 5. Check the initial condition of all three Level Locations, and map out the adjustments needed to level the three locations. 6. Systematically rotate through the remaining level locations, Level Location D, Level Location E, and Level Location F. (See Illustration 13) Turn each adjuster a maximum of 1 turn at a time. Use adjuster #9 to level Location D. Use adjuster #8 to level Location E. Use adjuster #7 to level Location F.
7. Adjust the table leveling pads until you center the bubble on Level Locations D, E and F at the same time. 126 Use the adjusters to level the table. Use the adjuster tool, 11/8 socket and 1/2 drive socket wrench to turn each adjuster. Use the mark on top of the adjuster to increment the adjuster rotation.
Tighten the Lock Rings: 1. Refer to Illustration 13. Recheck Level Locations, A through F. Use Location G to verify the table levelness. Make sure adjuster Location #1, #2, #3 and #4 all carry a portion of the gantry weight.
2. Screw down the adjusters at table Locations #5 and #6, until each rests tightly against its leveling pad. Tighten each adjuster a little more than hand tight, but take care not to unload any of the other table adjusters.
3. Tighten the lock rings at Locations #1 through #7 with the hammer and screwdriver.
18
127
Drill the Remaining Anchor Holes: 1. Remove the gantry scan window. 2. Prop open the top cover. 3. Open both front and rear gantry covers. 4. Use a piece of tape to mark the drill bit depth of 195 mm (711/16) from the tip of the 13mm (1/2) drill bit. 5. Use the 13mm (1/2) bit to drill the remaining six anchor holes, Location #2 through #7, with the system in place. a. Place a piece of cardboard over the ETC and CPU PWAs to prevent damage and dust contamination. b. Drill each hole until the mark on the drill bit is even with the top of the drill bushing. c. Place the drill bushing inside each adjuster, to keep the hole vertical, and centered, within the adjuster. Take special care to center the anchor holes in adjuster Location #5, #6 and #7, to provide maximum lateral alignment capacity when you center the cradle on isocenter during subsequent system testing. Take care not to injure yourself on the gantry cover brackets. Take care to avoid the actuator motor lead when you drill the Location #7 Anchor hole. Remove the lead, if necessary.
d. Every 15 or 20 seconds, stop the drill, and clear the hole of debris to prevent binding of the drill bit. 6. Vacuum all debris from the inside of the hole: a. Place the funnel tip inside the hole; place the vacuum hose in the funnel. b. If you can, continue to vacuum while you drill, to keep gantry and table as free of dust contamination as possible. c. When you finish clearing the anchor hole, vacuum the debris from the surrounding area.
d. Stop drilling frequently, to c 7. Do not drill anchor holes at Location #8 and #9. These locations help support the weight, but do not anchor the table into place.
19
128
Redundant Anchor Hole Locations: If you cannot use one of the adjuster anchor holes, due to structural interference, such as reinforcement bars in the concrete, use its redundant anchor location, shown in Illustration 14. Mark the 13mm (1/2) drill bit with a piece of tape 170 mm (611/16) from the tip of the bit, and follow the instructions in Section 127. Note: The Gantry requires a minimum of four anchors, one in each corner. The Table requires a minimum of three anchors, one each at Location #5, #6 and #7.
129
Install the Anchors: 1. Use only Hilti KwikBolt II anchors, 1/2 diameter by 8 long: P/N 2106573. 2. Remove the three alignment bars, and repack the install kit. 3. Refer to Illustration 15. Assemble the anchors before you install them: a. Add a 1/4 thick washer under the regular anchor washer b. Position the nut even with the first thread, as shown in Illustration 15. 4. Place an anchor in each hole. Refer to Illustration 15. Hammer the anchor downward, to completely insert the anchor in the hole.
5. Tighten the Location #1 through #7 anchors, and torque to 75 +/ 6 Nm (55 +/ 5 ftlbs). 6. Replace all the table parts you removed during installation, including covers, ground straps and the center support bar. 7. Refer to Illustration 11. Remove the gantry shipping bolts and brackets. 8. Close all the Gantry covers, and reinstall the scan window. Note: If you cannot replace the lower table cover because the floor interferes, adjust all of the table and gantry levelers by 1/2 turn increments, to raise the Table/Gantry until the lower table covers clear the floor. Return to Sections 123, 125 and 126 to Level the Gantry/Table and Tighten the Locking Rings.
110
ILLUSTRATION 11 INSTALLATION HARDWARE
111
ILLUSTRATION 12 LEVELING PAD AND ANCHOR LOCATIONS
112
ILLUSTRATION 13 GANTRY/TABLE LEVEL LOCATIONS
#8
#9
(Set level across short alignment bars.)
113
ILLUSTRATION 14 REDUNDANT ANCHOR LOCATIONS
114
ILLUSTRATION 15 ANCHOR ASSEMBLY
115
ILLUSTRATION 16 ADJUST LEVELING PAD
13
Assemble and Install the Gantry Display 1. Refer to display installation drawing, 46297720, provided for reference, with every system. 2. Route and connect the display cable, as shown on the drawing. 3. Attach the gantry display to the support arms. Firmly seat the display in the support arms.
4. Attach Gantry module, item 5, to the display assembly with four (item 8) 1/4/x20 x .75 machine screws. 5. Connect the ground wire between the gantry display, and the screw in the unpainted area of front gantry shroud brace (directly under the cable hole on the top of gantry shroud). Dress the ground wire to prevent interference with the rotating gantry structure.
116
14
Install Table Footswitch Assembly Install the Table Footswitch Assembly, as shown in Illustration 17.
ILLUSTRATION 17 INSTALL TABLE FOOTSWITCH ASSEMBLY
Locate the two plates attached to the table, 46297427P1. Install the braided grounds from the gantry, under these plates, not to the ground buss on the footswitch assembly.
Table
Install Table Footswitch assembly mounting hardware 1032 black oxide screws s/c 61221 (2) 14 __ 1 + __ 29 16 _ 16 (757.2 mm 760.4 mm) Table Footswitch assembly
Gantry
15
Position the Power Distribution Unit 1. Roll the PDU into position on its permanently mounted casters. 2. Leave at least 15.5cm (6) between the PDU and back wall, to allow cooling air to circulate. 3. Run the main input power conductors and ground through flexible metal conduit (attached between the PDU chassis and room ductwork) so you can move the PDU away from the wall during service.
16
Install Gantry/Table Pushbutton Controls 1. Feed the 3 cables to the Gantry/Table pushbutton controls through the holes in the front cover. Feed 2 cables through the left hole; feed one cable through the right hole.
2. Connect the 3 cables to the two Gantry/Table pushbutton control units. 3. Use the 8 screws and 8 lockwashers, provided, to install the two Gantry/Table pushbutton control units to the front gantry shroud. 4. Tywrap cables to prevent interference with the gantry rotating structure.
117
HISPEED CT/i GENERAL SERVICE SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL DIRECTION 2152926-100
1-61
Gantry Base Covers1. Install the raceway pan, 46-297624P1, (lower portion of the rear raceway assembly, 46-297628G1) before you run any cables to the gantry. a. Use the four sets of screws (46-170015P2) and washers (12-277) to attach the raceway pan to the rear of the gantry base, at the midway point. b. If the site uses floor troughs, discard the raceway pans cover plate, 46-297627P1 See Chapter 10; Appendix 10A contains a base cover installation drawing.
2. Install the rest of the gantry base covers during Chapter 10, after you check the Table/Gantry alignment. 1-7 1-7-1 Install Operator Console Remove Front Cover 1. Unlatch the two fasteners at the top corners of the front cover. 2. Rotate the fasteners counterclockwise, to the 5 oclock position.
ILLUSTRATION 1-8 OPERATOR CONSOLE FRONT COVER
Rotate Counter-Clockwise to Unlatch
Un-latched
Latched
3. Unlatch the front cover, and slide the top edge forward 1/2 inch. 4. Lift the cover up, and away from the console.
1-18
172
Attach Stabilizer Pads 1. Attach the two pads to the console stabilizers before you remove the console shipping dollies. (Refer to illustration 19) 2. Screw the pads all the way into the legs 3. After you move the console into position, lower the pads until the console no longer rocks forward.
ILLUSTRATION 19 CONSOLE STABILIZER PADS
173
Attach Keyboard Table Top 1. Older consoles are screwed into place. Use the four flathead 1/420 X 3/8 bolts to attach the keyboard table top to the support arms. See illustration 110. 2. Some new table tops will snap into place, allowing for easy removal and installation. See illustrtion 111
ILLUSTRATION 110 ATTACH KEYBOARD TO TABLE TOP
4 1/420 X 3/8 Flat Head
119
ILLUSTRATION 111 ATTACH KEYBOARD TO TABLE TOP
Use spring loaded handles to attach keyboard top to support arms. You may want to delay installing the top until the Octane computer is wired in Section 2.
120
174
Attach Keyboard Table Top and Position Console Refer to Illustration 112. The Console normally arrives with the bottom hole on the Monitor Top aligned with the fourth bolt from the bottom. For optimum operator comfort, align the bottom hole of the Keyboard Table Top with the third hole from the bottom, on the Console. Your site may have different requirements, and you may have to adjust the Monitor Top and/or Keyboard Table Top up or down from this position. Use three people to move the very heavy Monitor Top. Always select a Table Top height that permits the operator to see the patient on the table. Keep the one bolthole relationship between the Monitor Top and the Keyboard Table Top. Fasten the Keyboard Table Top one hole lower then the Console Table Top, as shown in Illustration 112.
When you move the console into its final position, maintain a 5cm (2) minimum distance between the console and the wall.
ILLUSTRATION 112 CONSOLE POSITION

Wall
5cm 2
Minimum
Keyboard Top: Start with the third hole from the bottom. Spec 8 +/ 1 foot pound Monitor Top: Start with the fourth hole from the bottom. Spec 8 +/1 foot pound
121
1-7-5
Monitor Placement You may order a CT/i System with a Color Monitor and/or Black and White Monitor and/or Color Monitor with a Touch Screen. Illustration 113 shows the monitor placement options.
ILLUSTRATION 1-13 CONSOLE MONITOR PLACEMENT
Color Monitor
or
Black/White
1-22
176
Seismic Mounting If site specifications require seismic mounting, use 1/2 bolts to mount the brackets to the floor. Refer to Illustration 114 for hole placement.
ILLUSTRATION 114 SEISMIC MOUNTING HOLE LOCATIONS
3.29 or 8.36cm
REAR
10.00 or 25.4cm
14.00 or 35.56cm
FRONT
44.00 or 111.76cm
Chapter 1 Complete
123
APPENDIX 1A STRIP DOWN GANTRY FOR RESTRICTED ACCESS
Strip Down Gantry for Restricted Access Remove the Gantry cover to move it through a 99cm (39 inch) door. 1. Remove gantry shipping dollies, if attached. 2. Lift the top cover, and support it with the bracket. 3. Open the front cover: a. Release the front covers top right strut. b. Remove the front right side lock bolt c. WARNING Carefully open the front cover.
THE FRONT COVER WEIGHS APPROXIMATELY 69KG (150 LBS). USE AT LEAST 3 PEOPLE TO HANDLE THE COVER SAFELY, AND WITHOUT DAMAGE. 1. Loosen the set screw on the upper and lower hinge pin. (Refer to Illustration 115 and Illustration 116) 2. Remove the upper and lower hinge pins, (lightly tap from the bottom) (Refer to Illustration 116) 3. Remove the front cover. 4. Lift the cover to clear the Gantry. 5. Carefully lay cover face down on a protected flat surface.
124
ILLUSTRATION 115 GANTRY FRONT SHROUD HINGE
Detail A
Gantry Front Shroud Hinge

ILLUSTRATION 116 HINGE PIN DETAIL
Hinge Pin
Set Screw Detail A
125
Remove Rear Gantry Shroud 1. Open the rear cover: a. Remove the gantry top cover. b. Disconnect the power cable from the top cover c. Unscrew the center top cover hinge from the rear shroud.
d. Slide the top cover to the left, to remove the cover 2. Unbolt the rear shroud from the gantry base by removing the four mounting bolts 3. Push the rear shroud back. 4. Remove the retaining rings from the hinge pins, on the upper right and left sides of the shroud. (Refer to Illustration 117). 5. Lift up on the rear shroud to remove it from the gantry. WARNING
THE REAR COVER WEIGHS APPROXIMATELY 55KG (120 LBS). USE AT LEAST 3 PEOPLE TO HANDLE THE COVER SAFELY, AND PREVENT DAMAGE.
ILLUSTRATION 117 REAR COVER HINGE PIN
Hinge Pin
Retaining Ring
126
CHAPTER 2 INSTALL POWER, GROUND AND INTERCONNECT CABLES
CHAPTER 2 CONTENTS
21 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 System Power and Ground Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Electrical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 System Component Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Cable Color Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Console Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Console Power (Indigo Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Console Power (Octane Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Computer Carrier (Indigo Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Computer Carrier (Octane Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Central Data Box (Octane Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Specialix option (Non Octane Systems Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Back Bulkhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Keyboard and Trackball Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Display Monitor, Color option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2610 RX Display Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Gantry Panels and Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 EMC Gantry Power Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 NonEMC Gantry Power Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Table and A7 Panel Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 PDU 2133533 Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 PDU 2133533 A2 Panel HVDC Supply Output Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 PDU 2133533 A1 Panel Axial Servo Amp Panel Output Connections . . . . . . . . . . 293 PDU 2133533 A3 Panel Circuit Breaker Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 PDU 2133533 A3 Panel Input Power Panel Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 PDU 2133533 A4 Panel Connector Bulkhead (Bottom View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 System Ground Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Contractor Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 23 23 23 24 25 25 26 27 28 29 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 226 227
21
21
Introduction Site use of conduit, floor duct, wall duct, or a raised computer floor, as well as the individual component layout determines the system cable sequence. If you can unload the cable boxes off the truck first, try to run cables while others unload the subsystems from the truck and/or move them to the CT room. Try to run the system cables after the Contractor completes the Contractor supplied wiring. All ground wires and other contractor wiring should be complete to the point of equipment placement. If the site uses raceway, you may have to postpone some raceway work, such as cutting and fitting covers at equipment locations, until after you complete the cabling and position the equipment.
CAUTION
Do not store excess cable in the bottom of the PDU. The 3phase transformer can induce stray currents, and the cables restrict air flow, which could cause the 3phase transformer and other PDU components to overheat. When possible, store excess cable length in a serpentine configuration, approximately 1 meter long. (Do NOT coil excess cable.) Some components have sufficient room for storage of excess cable lengths. In a few instances, you may have to provide separate cable storage, if the site doesnt have a computer floor.
ILLUSTRATION 21 EXCESS CABLE STORAGE CONFIGURATION
Tywraps
approximately 1 Meter
Keep signal and control cables away from power cables and power wiring. When you lay cables in a raceway, locate the signal cables in a separate section of the raceway.
Check all connection for tightness. Use suitable tools and judgment. Check all visible connections, especially ground connections.
Check for reasonable cable routing. Take into consideration necessary takeup distances for equipment maintenance, etc. Try to obtain as neat a job as possible.
22
22
System Power and Ground Guidelines At this point, you MUST physically inspect the System Power and Ground Connections for the following: The system should have a dedicated ground. Make sure the ground wire originates at the supplying transformer, and has no secondary ground connected to it, until it reaches the ground bar in our PDU. The system ground wire should be copper, and sized equal to, or larger than, the 3 phase supply wires, with a minimum size of AWG 1/0. The ground wire should take the same physical path (conduit) as the supply wires. The ground wire impedance from the system disconnect, including the ground rod, should not have an impedance greater than 2 ohms, to earth. Never bring the 480 volt system neutral into the PDU. Route all three phase wires, power cables, neutrals, and grounds in the same conduit or raceway duct. Do NOT route these cables in the same conduit or raceway duct as the system control cables.
Check all the ground connections on the system for tightness and proper termination. Check the ground connection at the supply transformer. Check the ground from the transformer to its earth connection. 23 Electrical Inspection Arrange for electrical code inspection if required. 24 System Component Identification
TABLE 21 SYSTEM COMPONENT IDENTIFIERS
Designator CT2 CT1 PM OC WL
System Component Gantry Patient Table Power Distribution Unit Operator Console (Console Computer) XRay ON Warning Light
Identify all system cables by the system component designators listed in Table 21. Each end of a system cable has a label, and may have a color near the connector, (see Table 22) to indicate the component, and the jack identifier of the component.
23
25
Cable Color Identifiers The ends of the cables may be marked with a piece of blue, yellow, red or orange colored tape, to help with the cable installation. Table 22 lists the subcomponent, and corresponding color.
TABLE 22 CABLE COLOR IDENTIFIERS
Subcomponent Gantry Table PDU Console Computer

TABLE 23 JACK IDENTIFIERS (INDIGO CONSOLES)
Color Blue Yellow Red Orange
J# J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7 J8
Device Rx Monitor EMC Chassis [1] Kieb [2] Modem [2] Video Splitter [2] Printer [2] Display Monitor Spare
J# J9 J10 J11 J12 J13 J14 J15 J16
Device Vieb [2] DASM [2] Image Printer [2] VCR [2] Remote Monitor [2] Spare Spare Computer Carrier [1]
TABLE 24 JACK IDENTIFIERS (OCTANE CONSOLES)
P# P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8
Device Rx Monitor Tranciever KIEB VCR Printer Video Splitter Display Monitor Ocatne Computer
P# P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16
Device VIEB] DASM Image Printer Modem Remote Monitor Spare Central Data EMC Chassis
24
26 261
Console Wiring Console Power (Indigo Systems)
ILLUSTRATION 22 POWER DETAIL (INDIGO SYSTEMS)
Front View
J1
J3
J5
J7
J2 J9
J4 J11
J6 J13
J8 J15
J10
J12
J14
J16
12
Console Power 2118139 From: PDU A4J5 Notes:
[1] [2]
Shown for reference, cable already installed. Option: Shown for reference, system may or may not have this cable Indicates Cable Run Number
25
2-6-2
Console Power (Octane Systems)
ILLUSTRATION 2-3 POWER DETAIL (OCTANE SYSTEMS)
Front View
J1
J3
J5
J7
J9
J11
J13
J15
J2
J4
J6
J8
J10
J12
J14
J16
12
Console Power 2118139 From: PDU A4J5 Notes: Shown for reference, cable already installed. Option: Shown for reference, system may or may not have this cable
Indicates Cable Run Number
2-6
263
Computer Carrier (Indigo Systems)
ILLUSTRATION 24 COMPUTER CARRIER DETAIL (INDIGO SYSTEMS)
Front View
Rx Video 2142221 From: Rx Monitor
Display Video 2142221 Color or 2143804 B/W From: Display Monitor
J33 Audio Out [1] J35 Audio In [1]
BIT3 [1] VCR Video [2] Specialix [1]
SCSI 1 [1]
Inter Suite [1] Line Printer [1] Camera SCSI 0 [1] J45 Insite Modem [3] J44 Security Key [1] 110 VAC [1] Inter Suite [1]
5
J41 Mouse: Route through console top using hole provided. J42 Keyboard [1]
Notes:
[1] [2] [3]
Shown for reference, cable already installed. Option: Shown for reference; system may or may not have this cable. This cable is shipped in the bottom of the RCU cabinet. Indicates Cable Run Number
27
264
Computer Carrier (Octane Systems)
ILLUSTRATION 25 COMPUTER CARRIER DETAIL (OCTANE SYSTEMS)
Octane Console Front View
28
265
Central Data Box (Octane Systems)
ILLUSTRATION 26 COMPUTER (OCTANE SYSTEMS) CENTRAL DATA BOX
29
266
Specialix option (Non Octane Systems Only)
ILLUSTRATION 27 SPECIALIX DETAIL
Front View
Autovoice 2142512 From: Gantry A1A5J7 Touch 2139581 [2] From: Rx Monitor
SP8
SP7
SP6
SP5
SP4
SP3
SP2
SP1
[1]
[1]
[1]
Laptop Tball Notes:

[1] [2]
Boot
Shown for reference, cable already installed. Option: Shown for reference, system may or may not have this cable. Indicates Cable Run Number
210
267
Back Bulkhead
ILLUSTRATION 28 BACK BULKHEAD DETAIL
Rear View
Keyboard 2139579 From: Keyboard
Intercom, Scan, EStop 2139577 From: Gantry A1A5J1
DAS Data 21178482 From: Gantry A1A5J5 LAN 2118150 From: Gantry A1A5J3 Scan Abort 2118148 From: Gantry A1A5J4
10 11
211
268
Keyboard and Trackball Cables Connect the Trackball and Keyboard cables, as shown in Illustration 29. Notice that the angled end of the keyboard cable connects to the keyboard, not the straight end.
Do not connect the mouse to the keyboard.

ILLUSTRATION 29 KEYBOARD/TRACKBALL DETAIL
Route the mouse cable through the console top, and connect it directly to the computer carrier. The mouse is cable run 5.
Trackball
4
Keyboard Cable
212
269
Display Monitor, Color option
ILLUSTRATION 210 DISPLAY MONITOR DETAIL
Rear View
Display Monitor Rx Monitor
DISPLAY MONITOR COLOR OPTION
RGB
110VAC From: P7
2142221 Video From: Computer Carrier Right Hand Video Plug Indicates Cable Run Number
213
2-6-10
RX Display Monitor The Rx color monitor may also have a touch option.
ILLUSTRATION 2-11 RX MONITOR DETAIL
Rear View
Display Monitor Rx Monitor
RX MONITOR
RGB
2 1
110VAC From: P1 2139581 Touch [1] From: Specialix #2 2142221 Video From: Computer Carrier Left Hand Video Plug Notes:
[1]
Option: Shown for reference; system may or may not have this cable.
2-14
27
Gantry Panels and Cable Connections
ILLUSTRATION 212 GANTRY
A1 A5 panel Detail A
A1 TS 1 Detail B
Gantry
ILLUSTRATION 213 A1A5 PANEL, DETAIL A
J1
J3 J7
8
2139577 J2
7
2142512
10
2118150
15
2118146
(J6 does not exist on an EMC gantry) EMC gantry has 4position TS1. (Terminal Strip 1.)
J4 J5
11
2118148
J6 Used for VX only (not used on RP or IG)

9
A1A5 Panel
**
21178482
Detail A
Note:
** Take extreme care when you install the fiber optic DAS data cable. (Part
#21178482). The DAS cable is fragile; do not step on it, kink or bend it sharply.
215
271
EMC Gantry Power Cable Connections Note: An EMC system has a gantry with a 4position TS1. (TS1 means terminal strip 1.) A nonEMC system gantry contains a 12position TS1.
ILLUSTRATION 214 EMC GANTRY DETAIL B
Blue (Neutral) Green/Yellow (Ground) Brow n (Hot)
AC LINE FILTER
2118142 120V AC from PDU
16
1
13
2118143 HV DC (550) from PDU
2118145 Servo Amp Power from PDU A1 TS 1
14
Install the TS1 terminal strip cover assembly with four 832 x .25 lg screws.
216
272
NonEMC Gantry Power Cable Connections Note: A nonEMC system gantry has a 12position TS1. (TS1 means terminal strip 1.) An EMC system gantry contains a 4position TS1.
Install the TS1 terminal strip cover assembly with four 832 x .25 lg screws.
ILLUSTRATION 215 NONEMC DETAIL B
12
11
10
14
46327155G1 Servo Amp Power from PDU A1 TS 1
46297080G1 HV DC (550) from PDU
13
2119603 110V AC from PDU
16
217
28
Table and A7 Panel Connections
ILLUSTRATION 216 HISPEED ADVANTAGE TABLE
ILLUSTRATION 217 A2A7 PANEL DETAIL A

etc board
Weldment Plate
A2A7 PANEL (DETAIL A: See Illustration 217)
J1 FROM GANTRY
J2 FROM GANTRY
J3 FROM TILT MOTOR
J6 FROM FOOTSWITCH
J5 FROM GANTRY
J8 FROM FOOTSWITCH
J7
17
2118141 Table Power from PDU
A2A7 Panel
218
29
PDU 2133533 Cable Connections
ILLUSTRATION 218 PDU AREA LOCATIONS
SERVO AMPLIFIER ASSEMBLY A1 PANEL
PDU CONTROL BOARD A6 PANEL TRANSFORMER ASSEMBLY (in back) A5 PANEL AC POWER DISTRIBUTION A3 PANEL HVDC SUPPLY A2 PANEL
INPUT POWER A3 PANEL OUTPUT CONNECTORS BULKHEAD A4 PANEL
219
291
PDU 2133533 A2 Panel HVDC Supply Output Connections
ILLUSTRATION 219 HVDC SUPPLY OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
TS11 (Red)
Ground
TS21 (Black)
PDU 2133533 A2 Panel HVDC SUPPLY OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
PDU 2133533
46297080G1 (for Non EMC Gantry)
13
2118143 (for EMC Gantry) Install Shield Clamp tightly around exposed Cable Shield at lower left of PDU. (EMC Gantry only)
NOTE: EMC gantry has 4position TS1 NonEMC gantry has 12position TS1 (TS1 stands for Terminal Strip 1).
220
292
PDU 2133533 A1 Panel Axial Servo Amp Panel Output Connections
ILLUSTRATION 220 AXIAL SERVO AMP PANEL OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
TS11 (Black) TS12 (Red)
TS13 (Shield)
PDU 2133533 A1 Panel Axial Servo Amp Panel
PDU 2133533
46327155G1 (for Non EMC Gantry) 2118145 (for EMC Gantry)
14
Install Shield Clamp Tightly Around Exposed Cable Shield at Lower Left of PDU. (EMC Gantry only)
NOTE: EMC gantry has 4position TS1 NonEMC gantry has 12position TS1 (TS1 stands for Terminal Strip 1).
221
293
PDU 2133533 A3 Panel Circuit Breaker Panel
ILLUSTRATION 221 A3 PANEL
CB1
Table 24 hr Console Relay control PWB Tilt/elevation drive Cradle GPDU service outlet Table service outlet SCU Gantry DCRGS 120vac
CB2 CB3 CB4 CB5
PDU 2133533
A3 Panel
222
294
PDU 2133533 A3 Panel Input Power Panel Connections
ILLUSTRATION 222 INPUT POWER PANEL CONNECTIONS
INPUT POWER PANEL
Parking position for Neutral wire, if present
Ground (To wall ground) L1 L2 L3 TB1
PDU 2133533
L1 = Phase A from wall L2 = Phase B from wall L3 = Phase C from wall
A3 Panel
223
295
PDU 2133533 A4 Panel Connector Bulkhead (Bottom View)
ILLUSTRATION 223 A4 PANEL (BOTTOM VIEW)
A4 PANEL CONNECTOR BULKHEAD
J3
NOT USED J4 J2
17
2118141 X J6 N.C. HVDC Keyswitch
16
J5 2119603 Non EMC 2118142 EMC
15
2118146
12
2118139
PDU 2133533 1 2 1 2 XRay Door Warning Light Interlock Ground from Footswitch Ground Bar
See next page for details to install XRay Warning Light and Door Interlock.
A4 Panel Door Interlock & Xray Warning Light
224
PDU 2133533 A4 Panel Connector Bulkhead (Bottom View), continued

ILLUSTRATION 224 XRAY WARNING LIGHT AND DOOR INTERLOCK CIRCUIT
PDU A4 PANEL
External Power source for Warning Light Ground Neutral
Room XRay Warning Light
External Low Voltage (<30v) Power Source for Xray Warning Light Relay Coil
XRay Warning Light Connections Hot Door Interlock 1 2 1 2 3 4

OUT IN
Neutral Hot
External Relay Neutral Hot
XRay Warning Light Circuit
XRay Warning Light 1 2 3 4
Door Interlock 1 2
PDU A4 PANEL
Normally Open Switch
Door Interlock Circuit

Note: Connect a door interlock to the system, to prevent XRay: remove the jumper from the door interlock connections on the PDU A4 panel, and connect a normally open switch across them. The Interlock circuit prevents XRay when you open the scan room door.
225
210
System Ground Connections
ILLUSTRATION 225 SYSTEM GROUND CONNECTIONS
PDU A3 EQUIPMENT GROUND BUS A4 GROUND BUS GANTRY CT2 CT1 RACEWAY GROUND BUS 1 20
#4 ROTATING PART #4 # 2* #1/0 * TABLE/GANTRY RACEWAY TABLE CT 1 # 2* E T C
SEE TABLE BELOW FOR CONNECTIONS Attach the1 inch braid to the table with two metal plates, 46297427P1 . Position the braid under each plate, and screw down the plate with the two bolts.
DETAIL
# 2*
# 1/0
VAULT GROUND
CONSOLE (OC)
* use ground wire supplied with system for these grounds
TABLE 25 SYSTEM GROUND CONNECTIONS
AWG #
CONNECTION
P.M. INSTALLED
Connection To #1/0** #2 #2 #2 #1/0 GND Braid (2) EARTH GROUND OC CT2 CT1 PM CT1
Connection To PDU CT1 RACEWAY #10 CT1 RACEWAY #9 CT1 RACEWAY #8 CT1 RACEWAY #11 CT2
** #1/0 is for field. Factory can use #4 for EARTH GROUND to PDU connection.
226
211
Contractor Connections FIELD: Ring out all wires before connecting.
CONNECTION OR WALL BOX A1
AWG# CONNECTION FROM #1 #1 #1 #1/0 Phase A Phase B Phase C GND CONNECTION TO PM A3 TB1 L1 A3 TB1 L2 A3 TB1 L3 Installed
A3 TB1 GND (Do NOT connect anything to Neutral point.) PM A4 WL Connection 1 PM A4 WL Connection 2 0A (Blk) (To External Warning Light Relay) Neutral (Wht) (To External Warning Light Relay) Ground (To warning light ground) PM A4 TS2 1,2
WL (Warning light)
#12 #12 #12
WL0A (Blk) (From external low voltage (<30v) power source) Neutral (Wht) (From external power source) PMA4 WL Connection 3 PMA4 WL Connection 4 Ground (From external power source)
Door Interlock
Room Door Interlock Connections

APPENDIX 2A
APPENDIX 2B APPENDIX 2C APPENDIX 2D APPENDIX 2E APPENDIX 2F APPENDIX 2G APPENDIX 2H APPENDIX 2I APPENDIX 2J APPENDIX 2K APPENDIX 2L APPENDIX 2M APPENDIX 2N
Chapter 2 Complete
227

ILLUSTRATION 226 NONEMC HISPEED CT/I INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM
How to use this page: Check box when cable end is installed. x t
TABLE CT1 (YELLOW)
GANTRY CT2 (BLUE)
[1]
PDU PM (RED)
(ORANGE)
Console
12
Power Panel t
PDU
A4 J5
Gantry
11
2118148 Scan Abort t A1A5 J4 A1A5 J3 A1A5 J5 A1A5 J1 A1A5 J7
2118139 Console Power t
Back Bulkhead J18
A1TS1 5, 6, 8
13
t HVDC Power t 46297080G1 (550)
A2
10
Back Bulkhead J17 Connect to the FEP t 2118150 LAN t
TS11 TS21 GND
9 8
Back Bulkhead J20 t 21178482 DAS Data [2] t 2139577 Intercom, Scan, EStop t 2142512 Autovoice t MOUSE A1TS1 9, 10, 11
14
t Axial Motor Power 46327155G1 t
A1
TS11 TS12 TS13
Specialix (SP) #5
t Computer Carrier J41
Display Monitor
Table
A2A7J1 t t
A2A7J3
A1A5 J2 LAN Tilt Limit Switch FIXED Tilt Motor Power FIXED t Signal A1TS1 1, 2, 3 FIXED FIXED
15
t Signal 2118146 t A4 J2
5
Computer Carrier Right Video Head
3
A2A7J2 t 2142221 Video t
16
A4 J4 t t 120VDC Power 2119603
t
A2A7J5
2 Specialx (SP) #2
t Back Bulkhead J19 Computer Carrier Left Video Head t
Rx Monitor
[4]
2139581 Touch t 2142221 Video t
17
A2A7J7
t
A2A7J8
2118141 Table Power
Raceway Footswitches FIXED
A4 J3
t t
A2A7J6
Footswitch FIXED Footswitch NOTES: [1] NonEMC gantry has a 12position TS1. [2] Use extreme caution when installing the fiber optic das data cable, part #21178482. It is fragile and should not be stepped on, kinked or bent sharply. [3] A variety of Monitors are available as options, see pages [4] Option.
Keyboard
4
2139579 Keyboard t TrackBall [4]
NON EMC HISPEED CT/i INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM

t
228

ILLUSTRATION 227 EMC HISPEED CT/I INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM
How to use this page: Check box when cable end is installed.# t
TABLE CT1 (YELLOW)
GANTRY [1] CT2 (BLUE)
PDU PM (RED)
(ORANGE)
Console
12
Power Panel t
PDU
A4 J5
Gantry
11
A1A5 J4 A1A5 J3 A1A5 J5 A1A5 J1 A1A5 J7 A1TS1 3, 4 A1TS1 1, 2
13
t HVDC Power 2118143 (550) * * t
A2
Back Bulkhead J18
2118148 Scan Abort t
TS11 TS21
10
Back Bulkhead J17 Connect to the FEP t 2118150 LAN t
9 8
Back Bulkhead J20 t Specialix (SP) #5 t Computer Carrier J41 5 Computer Carrier Right Video Head t MOUSE 2142512 Autovoice t 21178482 DAS Data [2] t 2139577 Intercom, Scan, EStop t
14
t Axial Motor Power 2118145 t
A1
TS11 TS12
Display Monitor
Table
A2A7J1 t t A2A7J3 t Tilt Motor Power FIXED t Signal A2A7J5 LAN Tilt Limit Switch FIXED FIXED FIXED A1A5 J2
* * * Shields grounded with clamp at PDU cabinet and gantry base
15
t Signal t 2118146 A4 J2
3
A2A7J2 t 2142221 Video t
16
A4 J4
2
Specialx (SP) #2 t Back Bulkhead J19 Computer Carrier Left Video Head t
Rx Monitor
[4]
Line Filter t 120VDC Power t Top: Blue 2118142 Bottom: Brown Middle:Green/Yellow
2139581 Touch
17
A2A7J7 t 2118141 Table Power Raceway Footswitches FIXED t Footswitch FIXED t Footswitch NOTES: [1] EMC gantry has a 4position TS1. [2] Use extreme caution when installing the fiber optic das data cable, part #21178482. It is fragile and should not be stepped on, kinked or bent sharply. [3] A variety of Monitors are available as options. [4] Option.
A4 J3 t
2142221 Video t A2A7J8 A2A7J6
Keyboard
4
2139579 Keyboard t TrackBall [4]
EMC HISPEED CT/i INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM
229

ILLUSTRATION 228 NONEMC HISPEED CT/I INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM
OCTANE SERIAL #2
230

OCTANE SERIAL #2
231
Page Left Intentionally Blank
232

233

TABLE 26 CONSOLE (2169455) CABLES INTERCONNECT LIST (OCTANE SYSTEMS ONLY)
Cable
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
Part #
2139577 2139579 2139589 2191420 2139580 21178482 21242159 2118150 2142512 2191425 2206183 2142221 2142221 21104952 2205217 2191432 2205216 2191434 2191435 2191439 21242156 2191441 2118148 2191442 2191443 2174129
Cable Type
Beldon 9809
From
Gantry Keyboard Interconnect Bd. & Stealth Bd.
Connector One End

37 pin Sub D
To
Interconnect Bd. Interconnect Bd.
Connector Other End

37 pin Sub D
25 pin Sub D Same as old cable 9 pin Sub D
Side Bulkhead Computer and Central Data Rear Bulkhead Gantry / Rear Bulkhead Side Bulkhead
25 pin Sub D Multiple Connectors 9 pin Sub D
Multiple Cables Alpha 2211 Fiber Optic Vendor Cable Coax
Side Bulkhead FEP Bd. FEP Bd. Computer Bit 3 PCI Gantry Gantry
Coax
Rear Bulkhead Dynaplan Converter Cable
Coax
8 Conductor
Computer Computer
RJ 45
Transceiver Modem Left Monitor Right Touch Monitor
RJ 45
Sony Cable SMF400 Sony Cable SMF400 50 Conductor Round Cable Beldon 9806 Round Cable 8 Conductor 4 Twisted pr. Madison Cable # Flat Ribbon Cable Flat Ribbon Cable Round Cable Beldon YR40973
Computer Computer DASM Central Data Port #3 Computer Computer Serial 2 Side Bulkhead Stealth Bd. Central Data SCSI Side Bulkhead 50 Pin Centronics SCSI 1 RJ 45 68 Pin SCSI 3 RJ 45 50 Pin Sub D 50 Pin SCSI 2 50 Pin SCSI 2
15 Pin Sub D 15 Pin Sub D 50 Pin SCSI2 25 Pin Sub D 50 Pin SCSI2 9 Pin Sub D 50 Pin Dual Inline 50 Pin Sub D 50 Pin Sub D
Central Data Service Key Central Data Dynaplan Cable to Gantry User Drive Assembly Side Bulkhead Side Bulkhead Bit 3VME
Beldon 9892 1 Twisted Pair Flat Ribbon Cable Round Cable Coax Cable
Transceiver Rear Bulkhead Hard Drive Assembly Side Bulkhead Transceiver
15 Pin Sub D 9 pin Sub D 50 Pin Sub D 50 Pin Sub D BNC
Stealth Bd. Gantry Hard Drives Hard Drive Assembly Rear Bulkhead
15 Pin Sub D 9 pin Sub D 50 Pin Dual Inline 50 Pin Sub D Panel Mount BNC
234

235

TABLE 27 CONSOLE (2169455) POWER AND GROUND (OCTANE SYSTEMS ONLY)
Cable
27
Part #
2191444
Cable Type
Discrete 18 AWG Wires
From
Power Supply
Connector One End

AMP 14807040
To
Intercom/Interconnect Bd. And VME Backplane VME Fans and User dr. Fan Side Bulkhead Side Bulkhead Outlet Box Assembly Outlet Box Assembly Outlet Box Assembly Outlet Box Assembly User Drive Assembly Outlet Box Assembly Outlet Box Assembly Outlet Box Assembly Hard Drive Assembly Hard Drives Ground Stud
Connector Other End

Terminals
Old Cable Number

2141471
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
2141469 2191450 2142224 2142226 Vendor Supplied Vendor Supplied Vendor Supplied 2141463 Vendor Supplied Vendor Supplied VendorSupplied 2191455 2191458 214051316
Discrete 18 AWG Wires Discrete 18 AWG Wires AC Cable AC Cable
Power Supply VME Cage Power Supply Side Bulkhead Modem
Same None Same Same None Same Same Same None Same None None None Same
AC Cable AC Cable Discrete 18 AWG Wires AC Cable AC Cable AC Cable Discrete 18 AWG Wires Discrete 18 AWG Wires Discrete 18 AWG Wire
Right Monitor Left Monitor VME Cage +/ 5 and +12 Octane Computer DASM Central Data Serial Port Side Bulkhead Hard Drive Assembly Outlet Box Assembly
236
CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM CONTINUITY and GROUND CHECKS
CHAPTER 3 CONTENTS
Use Section 31 with nonEMC systems that have PDU part number 2133533.
31 NonEMC systems with PDU part number 2133533 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3111 Required Tools: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Site Ground Impedance Check (NonEMC systems w/PDU part # 2133533) . . 3121 Ground Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Site Ground Current Check (NonEMC systems w/ PDU part #r 2133533) . . . . 3131 Required Tools: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3132 Check Ground Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 System Continuity & Gnd Checks (NonEMC w/ PDU part number 2133533) . 315 Site Ground Continuity Check (NonEMC w/ PDU part number 2133533) . . . . 32 32 32 32 32 33 33 33 34 35
Use Section 32 with EMC systems that have PDU part number 2133533.
32 EMC systems with PDU part number 2133533 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3211 Required Tools: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Site Ground Impedance Check (EMC systems w/ PDU part number 2133533) 3221 Ground Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Site Ground Current Check (EMC systems w/ PDU part number 2133533) . . . . 3231 Required Tools: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3232 Check Ground Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 System Continuity & Gnd Checks (EMC systems w/PDU part # 2133533) . . . . 325 Site Ground Continuity Check (EMC systems w/PDU part # 2133533) . . . . . . . . 36 36 36 36 36 37 37 37 38 39
31
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 31 NonEMC systems with PDU part number 2133533 Note:
A nonEMC system gantry contains a 12position TS1. (TS1 means terminal strip 1.) An EMC system gantry contains a 4position TS1.
311
Introduction Use Section 31 with nonEMC systems that have PDU part number 2133533. Use the continuity and ground checks to verify the system power connections have not shorted to ground, and that the ground and neutral connections are intact.
3111
Required Tools: DVM ECOS1023H Power Lineleakage Current Tester (60HZ) 46194427P248 Adapter Cables for Power Lineleakage Current Tester 46194427P249
312
Site Ground Impedance Check (NonEMC systems with PDU part number 2133533)
CAUTION
Turn OFF, tag and lock wall power. Use an ECOS1023100, or equivalent device, to measure the DC resistance between the following list of components in the system. Verify the given specifications:
3121
Ground Specifications Maximum DC resistance of 0.01 Ohm between: PDU A4 Ground Bus and Computer System ground point Independent Console and Computer System ground point All other Display or Computing Options and Computer System ground point
Maximum DC resistance of 0.025 Ohm between: Vault Ground and PDU A4 Ground Bus PDU A4 Ground Bus and Table/Gantry Raceway ground point Table and Table/Gantry Raceway ground point Gantry and Table/Gantry Raceway ground point Any room facility patient ground points and PDU A4 Ground Bus
Check box when complete.
32
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 313 Site Ground Current Check (NonEMC systems with PDU part number 2133533)
Measure the current on the System Ground in A1 with ALL equipment powered OFF, and the A1 disconnect handle pulled down. 3131 Required Tools: 3132 Beckman 3030 meter or equivalent Beckman CT231 clampon Amp probe 46194427P228 (Fits up to #2 size wire) Beckman CT232 clampon Amp probe 46194427P270 (Fits #1 size wire and larger)
Check Ground Current 1. Set meter range for AC Current 2M switch position 2. Use the appropriate clampon probe to measure the following: Note: The Amp probes are 1000:1. The 2M range may give a 0.123 reading, which is 123 milliamps A1 Panel System Ground ____. (In theory, this measurement equals 0 however, you may measure some current, <50 mA.) If you measure more than 50mA, use the System Ground Connection Illustration in Chapter 2 of this Direction, to doublecheck the chassis ground runs.
33
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 314 System Continuity and Ground Checks (NonEMC systems with PDU part number 2133533)
CAUTION
Turn OFF, tag and lock wall power. 1. Verify <1 ohm of resistance exists between the following ground connections: FROM Wall ground connection PDU A1 chassis TO PDU cabinet PDU cabinet
t Check box when complete.

2. Remove the PDU A3 circuit breaker panel cover. CAUTION
Turn OFF, tag and lock all power in the bay. 3. Use an ohmmeter to verify the presence of less than 1.0 ohm of resistance between each of the following points:
FROM PDU A2 TS1 (+HVDC) PDU A2 TS2 (HVDC RTN) PDU A1 TS11 (axial servo output) PDU A1 TS12 (+axial servo output) PDU A4 K24T2 (bottom relay on A4 panel) PDU A4 Ground Bus
TO Gantry A1 TS16 (+HVDC connection) Gantry A1 TS15 (HVDC RTN connection) Gantry A1 TS19 Gantry A1 TS110 Gantry A1 TS13 (Hot) Gantry A1 TS12 (Neutral) t Check box when complete t Check box when complete t Check box when complete t Check box when complete t Check box when complete t Check box when complete
4. Use an ohmmeter to verify the presence of less than 1.0 ohm of resistance between each of the following points: FROM PDU A3 Ground Bus PDU A3 Ground Bus PDU A3 Ground Bus TO Gantry A1 TS11 Gantry AC Ground Gantry A1 TS18 HVDC cable shield Gantry A1 TS111 Axial cable shield t Check box when complete t Check box when complete t Check box when complete
34
CAUTION
Turn OFF all PDU circuit breakers.
5. Set an ohmmeter to the lowest scale. Check between the following points for shorts to ground. Verify no continuity exists between the following points: FROM PDU A2 TS1 (+HVDC) PDU A2 TS2 (HVDC) PDU A1 TS11 (axial servo output) PDU A1 TS12 (+axial servo output) TO Bay vault ground Bay vault ground Bay vault ground Bay vault ground t Check box when complete t Check box when complete t Check box when complete t Check box when complete
6. Replace the cover over terminal strip TS1, on the left side of the gantry. Leave the metal cover off the PDU A3 input power panel until you complete the checks in the next section.
t
315 Site Ground Continuity Check (NonEMC systems with PDU part number 2133533)
CAUTION
Turn OFF, tag and lock wall power.
1. Unplug all units. 2. Review the System Ground Connection Illustration in Chapter 2, and make sure you securely fastened all connections, at both ends. Note: The next step verifies the presence of chassis ground connections between system components. This procedure does not provide a comprehensive check of the quality of those connections. 3. Use an ohmmeter to verify the presence of less than 1.0 ohm of resistance between each of the following points: FROM PDU A3 Ground Bus PDU A3 Ground Bus Table/Gantry raceway ground point Table/Gantry raceway ground point Table/Gantry raceway ground point All Display or Computing Options Any room facility patient ground points Vault ground Table/Gantry raceway ground point Gantry Table Operator Console Operator Console PDU A4 Ground Bus TO t Check box when complete t Check box when complete t Check box when complete t Check box when complete t Check box when complete t Check box when complete t Check box when complete
35
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 32 EMC systems with PDU part number 2133533 Note:
A nonEMC system gantry contains a 12position TS1. (TS1 means terminal strip 1.) An EMC system gantry contains a 4position TS1.
321
Introduction Use Section 32 with EMC systems that have PDU part number 2133533. Use the continuity and ground checks to verify the system power connections have not shorted to ground, and that the ground and neutral connections are intact.
3211
Required Tools: DVM ECOS1023H Power Lineleakage Current Tester (60HZ) 46194427P248 Adapter Cables for Power Lineleakage Current Tester 46194427P249
322
Site Ground Impedance Check (EMC systems with PDU part number 2133533)
CAUTION
Turn OFF, tag and lock wall power. Use an ECOS1023100, or equivalent device, to measure the DC resistance between the following list of components in the system. Verify the given specifications:
3221
Ground Specifications Maximum DC resistance of 0.01 Ohm between: PDU A4 Ground Bus and Computer System ground point Independent Console and Computer System ground point All other Display or Computing Options and Computer System ground point
Maximum DC resistance of 0.025 Ohm between: Vault Ground and PDU A4 Ground Bus PDU A4 Ground Bus and Table/Gantry Raceway ground point Table and Table/Gantry Raceway ground point Gantry and Table/Gantry Raceway ground point Any room facility patient ground points and PDU A4 Ground Bus
36
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 323 Site Ground Current Check (EMC systems with PDU part number 2133533)
Measure the current on the System Ground in A1 with ALL equipment powered OFF, and the A1 disconnect handle pulled down. 3231 Required Tools: 3232 Beckman 3030 meter or equivalent Beckman CT231 clampon Amp probe 46194427P228 (Fits up to #2 size wire) Beckman CT232 clampon Amp probe 46194427P270 (Fits #1 size wire and larger)
Check Ground Current 1. Set meter range for AC Current 2M switch position 2. Use the appropriate clampon probe to measure the following: Note: The Amp probes are 1000:1. The 2M range may give a 0.123 reading, which is 123 milliamps A1 Panel System Ground ____. (In theory, this measurement equals 0 however, you may measure some current, <50 mA.) If you measure more than 50mA, use the System Ground Connection Illustration in Chapter 2 of this Direction to doublecheck the chassis ground runs. t Check box when complete.
37
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 324 System Continuity and Ground Checks (EMC systems with PDU part number 2133533)
CAUTION
Turn OFF, tag and lock wall power. 1. Verify <1 ohm of resistance exists between the following ground connections: FROM Wall ground connection PDU A1 chassis TO PDU cabinet PDU cabinet

2. Remove the PDU A3 circuit breaker panel cover. CAUTION
Turn OFF, tag and lock all power in the bay. 3. Use an ohmmeter to verify the presence of less than 1.0 ohm of resistance between each of the following points:
FROM PDU A2 TS1 (+HVDC) PDU A2 TS2 (HVDC RTN) PDU A1 TS11 (axial servo output) PDU A1 TS12 (+axial servo output) PDU A4 K24T2 (bottom relay on A4 panel) PDU A4 Ground Bus
TO Gantry A1 TS11 (+HVDC connection) Gantry A1 TS12 (HVDC RTN connection) Gantry A1 TS14 Gantry A1 TS13 Gantry A1 AC Filter Bottom connection (Hot) Gantry A1 AC Filter Middle connection (Neutral) t Check box when complete t Check box when complete t Check box when complete t Check box when complete t Check box when complete t Check box when complete
4. Use an ohmmeter to verify the presence of less than 1.0 ohm of resistance between each of the following points: FROM PDU A3 Ground Bus PDU A3 Ground Bus PDU A3 Ground Bus TO Gantry A1 AC Filter Top connection (Ground) Gantry A1 TS1 HVDC cable shield Gantry A1 TS1 Axial cable shield t Check box when complete t Check box when complete t Check box when complete
38
CAUTION
Turn OFF all PDU circuit breakers. 5. Set an ohmmeter to the lowest scale. Check between the following points for shorts to ground. Verify no continuity exists between the following points:
FROM PDU A2 TS1 (+HVDC) PDU A2 TS2 (HVDC) PDU A1 TS11 (axial servo output) PDU A1 TS12 (+axial servo output)
TO Bay vault ground Bay vault ground Bay vault ground Bay vault ground t Check box when complete t Check box when complete t Check box when complete t Check box when complete
6. Replace the cover over terminal strip TS1, on the left side of the gantry. Leave the metal cover off the PDU A3 input power panel until you complete the checks in the next section.
t
325 Site Ground Continuity Check (EMC systems with PDU part number 2133533)
CAUTION
Turn OFF, tag and lock wall power. 1. Unplug all units. 2. Review the System Ground Connection Illustration in Chapter 2, and make sure you securely fastened all connections, at both ends.
Note:
The next step verifies the presence of chassis ground connections between system components. This procedure does not provide a comprehensive check of the quality of those connections. 3. Use an ohmmeter to verify the presence of less than 1.0 ohm of resistance between each of the following points:
FROM PDU A3 Ground Bus PDU A3 Ground Bus Table/Gantry raceway ground point Table/Gantry raceway ground point Table/Gantry raceway ground point All Display or Computing Options Any room facility patient ground points Vault ground
TO t Check box when complete t Check box when complete t Check box when complete t Check box when complete t Check box when complete t Check box when complete t Check box when complete Table/Gantry raceway ground point Gantry Table Operator Console Operator Console PDU A4 Ground Bus
39
Chapter 3 Complete
APPENDIX 3A
310
CHAPTER 4 PDU INTEGRATION

CHAPTER 4 CONTENTS
41 Systems with PDU 2133533 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 PDU 2133533 Area Designators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Initial Configuration for Systems with PDU 2133533 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4141 Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4142 Relay Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4143 Power Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4144 Hardware and Connection Check (Field Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4145 Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Suite Emergency Stop Checks Systems with PDU 2133533 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Line Transformer Settings Systems with PDU 2133533 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4161 Line Input Conditions: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 System Power Up Systems with PDU 2133533 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Gantry Display TestSystems with PDU 2133533 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Remaining Power Switches Systems with PDU 2133533 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Systems with PDU 2133533 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 PDU 2133533 Area Designators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Initial Configuration for Systems with PDU 2133533 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4141 Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4142 Relay Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4143 Power Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4144 Hardware and Connection Check (Field Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4145 Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Suite Emergency Stop Checks Systems with PDU 2133533 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Line Transformer Setting Systems with PDU 2133533 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4161 Line Input Conditions: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 System Power Up Systems with PDU 2133533 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Gantry Display Test Systems with PDU 2133533 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Remaining Power Switches Systems with PDU 2133533 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 41 41 42 44 44 44 44 44 44 45 45 45 46 47 47 41 41 41 42 44 44 44 44 44 44 45 45 45 46 47 47
41
Systems with PDU 2133533 CAUTION
This procedure measures potentially hazardous voltages.
411
Introduction Use this procedure to check PDU voltages, test the suite Emergencystop, and power up the system.
412
Required Tools Multimeter with a rating of at least 1000 volts Multimeter leads with a rating of at least 1000 volts
41
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 413 PDU 2133533 Area Designators
ILLUSTRATION 41 PDU 2133533 AREA DESIGNATORS
SERVO AMPLIFIER ASSEMBLY A1 PANEL
PDU CONTROL BOARD A6 PANEL TRANSFORMER ASSEMBLY (in back) A5 PANEL AC POWER DISTRIBUTION A3 PANEL HVDC SUPPLY A2 PANEL
INPUT POWER A3 PANEL OUTPUT CONNECTORS BULKHEAD A4 PANEL
42

ILLUSTRATION 42 PDU 2133533 TAP POSITIONS (REAR)
Transformer Taps and Jumpers
2 4 5 6 3 H3 H2
2 4 5 6 3 H1
2 4 5 6 3
High Voltage Transformer A5 Panel
ILLUSTRATION 43 PDU 2133533 CONTROL BOARD (A6 PANEL)
Room Light Jumper XRay A
Prep B JP1
Man HVDC
HV Test
Normal
PDU Control Board A6 Panel
Normal
S1
S2
43
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 414 Initial Configuration for Systems with PDU 2133533
CAUTION
Turn OFF wall power; tag it and lock it off.
4141
Circuit Breakers Set all circuit breakers to OFF
t
4142 Relay Board 1. Set SW1 and SW2 to the normal position.
2. Set the Room Light jumper (JP1) to meet hospital requirements. Position A enables the room warning light during XRay only. Position B enables the room warning light as soon as HVDC turns on. (See Illustration 43.)
t
4143 Power Switches
1. Turn OFF all power switches on all subsystems (gantry status display box, STC, DAS, table, console, computer, and SCU).
t
2. Set the HVDC Enable Key Switch (S1) to DISABLE.
t
4144 Hardware and Connection Check (Field Only)
Use this step to check mechanical connections, and tighten anything that may have shaken loose during shipment. Verify all hardware and connections in the PDU are securely fastened.
t
4145 Covers
Install, or verify the presence of, all the lexan safety covers.
44
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 415 Suite Emergency Stop Checks Systems with PDU 2133533
CAUTION
Verify all personnel have cleared the system before you turn on wall power. 1. Turn wall power ON to the PDU. 2. Make sure the following green LEDs on the PDU Control board light: DS12 DS13 DS14 DS17 DS19 DS20 DS21 DS22
3. Make sure none of the Red LEDs on the PDU Control light. 4. Press the suite emergency off button; verify it turns off wall power to the PDU.
t
416 Line Transformer Settings Systems with PDU 2133533 WARNING
MAKE SURE YOU TURNED OFF, TAGGED AND LOCKED THE MAIN WALL POWER BEFORE YOU CHANGE TAPS. FAILURE TO DISCONNECT POWER AT MAIN INPUT MAY RESULT IN ELECTROCUTION. TURN OFF WALL POWER TO CONNECT OR MOVE METER LEADS, OR TO REMOVE OR INSTALL COVERS.
4161
Line Input Conditions: 1. Remove metal cover over right A3 panel. 2. Monitor the No Load Line to Line Voltage at A3 L1, L2, L3, during the workday. Do not record this data during brown out conditions.
3. Refer to Table 41. After you determine the nearest nominal line, verify the tap connections match. Refer to Illustration 42 for tap locations. 4. Verify that the No Load Line to Line Voltage never falls outside the corresponding minimum and maximum values listed in the Table. 5. Use a 0750 AC voltmeter of 3/4% accuracy to measure the linetoline voltages at A3 L1, L2, and L3. Verify the highest linetoline voltage does not exceed 1.02 times the lowest voltage. Example: IF the lowest voltage equals 474, the highest voltage should not exceed 474 x 1.02 = 483.5 volts.
45

TABLE 41 PDU 2133533 LINE TAP CONNECTION TABLE
NO LOAD LINE TO LINE VOLTAGES Nominal 480V 460V 440V 420V 400V 380V Maximum Range (+/ 8%) 442 to 518 423 to 497 405 to 475 386 to 454 368 to 432 350 to 410
TAP CONNECTIONS (All 3 phases must be same configuration) Phase A Connection 34 35 36 24 25 26 Phase B Connection 34 35 36 24 25 26 Phase C Connection 34 35 36 24 25 26
CAUTION
Turn off, tag, and lock wall power. 6. Replace the metal cover over the right A3 panel.
t
417 System Power Up Systems with PDU 2133533 1. Turn OFF Wall Power. 2. Turn ON all PDU A3 circuit breakers. CAUTION
Verify all personnel have cleared the system before you turn on wall power. 3. Turn ON wall power.
46
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 418 Gantry Display Test Systems with PDU 2133533
Watch the gantry display during its powerup selftest, and verify the tests complete successfully. 1. Turn ON switch S3 in the table (120vac 24hr power). The Gantry Display automatically runs its PowerUp SelfTest when you turn on the table 24hr power.
2. Verify the following SelfTests run on the Gantry display: a. Lights and digital displays light one at a time, in sequence. b. Lights and digital displays flash several times, one at a time, in sequence. c. Lights and digital displays flash several times at the same time.
d. Lights and digital displays remain on.
t
3. Turn ON the gantry XRAY/DRIVES PWR.
XRay/Drives power light changes from blinking to continuous on.
t
Tube fans turn on.
4. Turn ON the gantry 120vac enable switch on the gantry status display box.
t
419 Remaining Power Switches Systems with PDU 2133533
1. Turn ON the DAS power switch, located on the outside of the DAS power supply assembly. 2. Turn ON the STC power switch, on the STC chassis. 3. Turn ON Table switches, S1 and S2. 4. Turn ON Console circuit breaker, CB1.
t
Chapter 4 Complete
47

APPENDIX 4A
48
CHAPTER 5 COMPUTER INTEGRATION
CHAPTER 5 CONTENTS
51 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Requirements/Assumptions: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Power Up Stop for Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Keyboard Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 NonEnglish Keyboard Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561 Start System Stop the CT/i AutoStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Touch Calibration (Hardware Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Monitor Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581 Monitor Manual Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582 Factory PreSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583 Center the Raster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584 Set Monitor Color Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585 Monitor Brightness and Contrast Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586 Adjust the Raster Horizontal and Vertical Size and Tilt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587 Adjust Pincushion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588 Adjust Convergence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 Default Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510 Set Timezone and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 Change Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5111 New Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 Reconfig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5121 reconfig the OC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5122 reconfig the SBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 Restore System State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 Install Options (Customer Purchased Option(s)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 Verify Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 Adjust Intercom Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5161 Autovoice and CBT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 5A CAMERA SETUP TIPS From Field Service Tips, Rev 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 5B touch screen defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 52 52 52 52 53 53 54 55 56 56 56 56 56 57 57 57 57 57 58 58 58 59 59 59 510 511 512 512 513 514 518
51
51
Introduction This chapter describes the RECONFIG, System State Restore, Options and Monitor Adjustment procedures. Use RECONFIG to enter/change site specific parameters on a HiSpeed CT/i System, with previously loaded operating system, platform and diagnostic software.
52
Required Tools Service Desktop Applications
53
Requirements/Assumptions: (1) All stations in a suite must have the same SUITE ID. (2) You need the name of all hosts in the suite, and their corresponding Internet/Ethernet numbers. (3) You need the Internet (IP) addresses the first time you execute a reconfig on the system. When you connect the system to a network, contact the hospitals network system administrator to obtain an IP address for the suite. You also need to know the IP address for each gateway that will be used. You can use the default internet number on standalone systems. (standalone = not connected to any network)
CAUTION
This procedure instructs you to REGEN DATABASE when you execute a reconfig. REGEN the DATABASE during the initial installation, or Upgrade, of a System. (The initial Installation or Upgrade assumes the disks do not contain any Calibration Data.) The reconfig process, described in the following procedure, destroys any existing system Calibration Data. Stop for Maintenance
54
Power Up
'
1. Power up the RCU. 2. When the window appears Starting up the system . . . Select 55
Stop for Maintenance
Keyboard Configuration The CT/i System can be used with 1 of 4 keyboards; English US (default) German DE Swedish SE French FR
The computer leaves the factory configured for the English US keyboard. If your system is using that keyboard then continue with section 561.
52
56
NonEnglish Keyboard Configuration A screen will pop up with several icons: Start System Install System Software Run Diagnostics Recover System Enter Command Monitor Select Keyboard Layout
1. Use the mouse and click on Select Keyboard Layout 2. Select the appropriate keyboard type. The currently supported keyboards are: o English US (default) o German DE o Swedish SE o French FR
3. Select Apply to reconfigure. 561 Start System ' Stop the CT/i AutoStart 1. Select Start System. 2. Stop the CT/i AutoStart by selecting window appears.
Cancel
when the pink attention
53
57
Touch Calibration (Hardware Option) If your system has the touch option, follow the instructions, below, to calibrate this feature. 1. In a Unix Shell window, become root: su root <Enter> (then enter the password) 2. Type: cd /usr/g/xtouch <Enter> 3. Type: setup Note: The Serial Device Name field should contain: /dev/ttya2 4. Click on |software calibrate| 5. Touch on the lower left corner. 6. Touch on the upper right corner. 7. Click on |save settings| 8. Click on |exit| These settings will not take effect until the next time ctuser logs in. Continue with the following steps to have the calibrations take effect. 9. In the Unix Shell type: exit <Enter> to log out as root. 10. In the Unix Shell type: sd <Enter> Wait for the system to shutdown. 11. ReStart the System. 12. Stop the CT/i AutoStart by selecting window appears. Note: If the monitor touch screen does not work, go to Appendix B and verify the touch Setup menu contains the values in the table.
Cancel
when the pink attention
54
58
Monitor Set Up This chapter describes the steps required to set up the two Display Monitors. The flowchart in Illustration 51 provides an overview of the Monitor Setup procedure. Use the detailed procedures in the following sections to set up the monitors.
ILLUSTRATION 51 MONITOR SETUP FLOWCHART
Start
Factory PreSet
Set Color
Adjust Brightness and Contrast
Adjust H/V Size, Center and Tilt
Adjust Convergence Pincushion
End
55
581
Monitor Manual Use The following steps are the proper order to follow for adjustment. You will need to reference the monitor manual that arrived in the monitor box for specific control procedures.
582
Factory PreSet 1. Reference the monitor manual and reset all adjustments to factory preset levels.
583
Center the Raster 1. Reference the monitor manual and center the raster. a. The monitors normally have a blank area to the left and right of the display, to maintain the correct aspect ratio.
584
Set Monitor Color Temperature 1. Reference the monitor manual and select the 6500K color temperature.
585
Monitor Brightness and Contrast Setup Color monitors have a lower light output than black and white monitors. Take care when you adjust the monitor brightness & contrast on CT/i systems. If the operators tell you they think the image on the monitor looks softer than the image on the film, and they like the film, adjust the monitor Brightness and Contrast to compensate for its lower light output. Use the following procedure to adjust the monitor Brightness and Contrast, until the operator sees the anatomical structure (window width) at the expected window levels. 1. Adjust the ambient room light to the level used by the operator during image review. 2. Display the Image Works desktop. 3. Display the SMPTE pattern: a. Use the browser to select Exam 1000, which contains the SMPTE pattern, and enlarge the image to full screen display. or (if Exam 1000 does not appear in the browser) b. Select the Service Desktop c. Select |Trouble Shooting|
d. Select |Install SMPTE| (then repeat step a.) 4. Increase the Contrast to maximum. 5. Increase the Brightness to maximum. 6. Decrease the Brightness, until the raster just fades into, and matches, the monitor screen background.
56
586
Adjust the Raster Horizontal and Vertical Size and Tilt. 1. Reference the monitor manual and adjust the horizontal, vertical raster size and tilt.
587
Adjust Pincushion 1. Reference the monitor manual and adjust the pincushion.
588
Adjust Convergence 1. Display the Service Desktop. 2. From the Service Toolbox, open a UNIX shell on the righthand monitor. 3. Type confidence <enter>. 4. On the window that is displayed, select the |Monitor| icon. 5. Pull down the |Test| menu, and select |Start Testing|. 6. Select |Convergence| from the monitor menu, to display the convergence pattern on the righthand display monitor. 7. Reference the monitor manual and adjust the convergence. 8. Select |Quit| from the monitor menu when done. Then pull down the |File| menu and select |Exit|, and finally type exit <enter> in the shell window. 9. To perform convergence adjustments on the lefthand (exam Rx) monitor, place the cursor in the upper half of the lefthand monitor screen. 10. Press <AltF3> (simultaneously press the Alt and the F3 keys), to display the Service Toolbox on the lefthand monitor screen. 11. From the Service Toolbox, open a UNIX shell on the lefthand monitor. Then perform steps 3. through 8. of this procedure on the lefthand monitor.
59
Passwords Note: Type the text shown in boldface, and press the <enter> key on the keyboard. (Type/enter bold = Type bold <enter>.)
591
Default Passwords Forward production HiSpeed CT/i systems have the following default passwords: root: #bigguy <enter> ctuser: 4$apps <enter>
GE changed these defaults in response to customer and field requests for tighter security, especially for systems operating on networks. We suggest you change the default passwords ONLY by customer request. Then, contact your support center to report the new passwords.
57
510
Set Timezone and Time 1. Open a Unix Shell OC window from tool chest, become root: su <enter> (then enter the root password) 2. Type: reconfig [Enter]. 3. Change the timezone selection on the System Settings screen to the correct timezone for the location of the system. . Note: If you cannot find an exact match for your timezone on the System Settings screen, select Universal, and enter the offset from GMT/UTC. In this case, automatic changes for daylightsaving time will not take effect. 4. [Accept] the reconfig (the system will reboot) 5. Open a Unix Shell OC window from tool chest, become root: su <enter> (then enter the root password) 6. Enter the setdate command, type: setdate MMDDhhmmYYYY [Enter] MM is month (0112), DD is day (0131), hh is hour (0023), mm is minutes (059), YYYY is the year. Example: For April 5, 4:24 pm, 1997 type: setdate 040516241997 The system responds with: Updating the time on the OC and SBC, Please wait... Current OC date: Sat Apr 5 14:24:01 CST 1997 Current SBC date: Sat Apr 5 14:24:01 CST 1997 setdate completed with NO ERRORS
7. Verify, as in the above example, that the time & date reported by both the OC & SBC are the same (+/ 3 sec.). If they are not, restart this procedure at step #1. Note: When you turn off the computer, always check the date and time after you restore power to the system. 8. Type exit <enter>
511 5111
Change Tube New Tube newTu creates new tube usage files. Initial Conditions: Ensure the SBC is booted. Applications must not be up.
1. Open a UNIX Shell, and type newTu <enter>. 2. Answer the questions. Note: The ChangeTube software updates the applicable files on the OC and the SBC with the information that you enter.
58
512 5121
Reconfig reconfig the OC Note: When you reconfigure the OC, you MUST reconfig the SBC. The document collector box that arrived with your system, contains an OC/SBC System Reconfiguration procedure, PN 2168070100 for your reference. 1. Type/enter su to change to root. 2. Type cd /usr/g/scripts <enter>. 3. Type reconfig <enter> to open the reconfig UIF. 4. Select config <enter> to open the reconfig UIF. 5. Select Regenerate Database? |Yes| on the first configuration screen, to erase the former calibration information. Note: For camera setup tips, see Appendix 5A . 6. Complete the remaining configuration screen data field selections. Refer to the OC/SBC System Reconfiguration procedure, PN 2168070100 (located in the document collector box that arrived with your system), for illustrations of the Configuration screens and explanations of the data fields. 7. When you finish all the configuration screen data parameters, select |Accept| at the top of the screen. 8. Select |Yes| when the screen prompts you to reboot now.
5122
reconfig the SBC 1. Open a UNIX shell. 2. Type/enter cu sbc If you do not get a prompt, press Enter a couple times.
Note: If this doesnt work, try sending a break signal ~%b (ie: tilde percent b).
3. Login as root 4. Type/enter reconfig Note: Wait for the SBC reconfig to complete. The software automatically reboots the sbc when it completes the SBC reconfig. 5. Exit the cu session type ~ . i.e.: to exit the cu session press the following keys: <tilde><dot><Enter>
59
513
Restore System State Your system should have a system state MOD cartridge, located in the software collector box. The system state MOD contains: kV Test Baseline ZAlign Baseline Collimator Characterization Phantom Calibrations
The Installation process uses all the system state files. At this time, use the system state MOD to restore the Phantom Calibrations and System Characterization files. If you cannot locate an existing system state MOD, follow instructions later in this Installation Manual to manually Characterize the System and perform Phantom Calibrations. 1. Select |Service|
Service
2. Select |PM|
PM
3. Select |System State| to open the System State tool.
PM
System State
START
4. Insert the MOD cartridge in the Maxopticst MOD drive. 5. Select |Charact|, |Cals| then |Restore| to restore the System Characterization and Phantom Calibration files to the system.
510
514
Install Options (Customer Purchased Option(s)) Your system may have one or more MOD cartridges that contain customer purchased options. If your system has an options MOD(s), install it at this time. 1. Open a UNIX Shell and type installOptions <enter>. The Software Options tool opens.
2. Insert the options MOD into the Maxopticst MOD drive. Make sure that the options MOD is NOT write protected, if this is the first installation of this option. 3. Select the options in the lefthand column to install the corresponding software. 4. Select |install| Note: If your customers options include either the ConnectPro option or the Dentascan option, please refer to the Option Installation Manual that came with your option package for detailed instructions regarding special setup instructions for that option. Or refer to the Load From Cold Manual (P/N 2168070100).
A box may appear while the options are loading When the option is displayed in the Installed Options list, then installation of that option is complete. Note that some options take a fraction of a second to install, while options like 3D may take a half a minute (due to the fact that they are installing software).
5. After all the options are installed, select Quit, then OK. 6. Remove the MOD & write protect the side with options. (Notice: The initial install requires the MOD to NOT be write protected; subsequent installs can be done with the MOD write protected) Note: If you have more than one options MOD, do NOT reboot at this time, but continue as directed in the next steps. When you have completed installing all options, proceed to reboot as directed in step 8. 7. If you have another option MOD to load, go back to step 1.. 8. When you have completed loading all customer options, reboot the system as directed on the screen, to fully enable the options.
511
515
Verify Options Use this section to verify you successfully installed the options during Section 514. Skip this section if you did NOT install customer purchased options on this system. 1. Select |Service|
Service
2. Select |SYSTEM INTEGRATION|
SYSTEM INTEGRATION 3. Select |Verify Options|
Computer Integration
Verify Options
START
4. Select |START|
. . . START. . . 5. When the shelltool opens, verify that it lists all the options you loaded during section 514. 516 Adjust Intercom Volume Thumbwheel function: a. To adjust the Gantry Speaker Volume: Adjust the leftmost volume thumbwheel while speaking into the Console Microphone.
512
b. To adjust the Console Speaker volume: Adjust the center volume thumbwheel while speaking into the Gantry Microphone. 5161 Autovoice and CBT Note: Locate the Audio Panel GUI in the upper lefthand corner of the Display Monitor. If you dont see it, move the mouse pointer to the upper lefthand corner, and press <ALT F3> to bring the GUI forward. 1. Click on the Audio Panel GUI icon to open it. 2. Select |Options| and |Output Sliders Independent|. 3. Set the Left Channel to HIGH to play autovoice to the table/gantry speaker. 4. Set the Right Channel 1/3 from the bottom, for playback to the console speaker. Note: Set the Options every time you reboot the system.
Chapter 5 Complete
513
APPENDIX 5A CAMERA SETUP TIPS

From Field Service Tips, rev 9.
CAMERA SETUP
LFC: During the Load from Cold procedure, the software leads you to the Hispeed CT/i System Configuration screen to setup your system defaults, preferences, and hardware settings. Select the configure |Hardware| button to set up the Camera & Filming parameters.
1. Highlight all the available film formats. 2. Select the 4x3 format, or most often used film format, as your site default. 3. Select the correct (digital or analog) camera, and corresponding options. Note: Digital camera films do not have gray scales. 4. Select SMOOTH or SHARP film quality. Important: Based on clinical experience, we recommend the following settings:
Kodak: Smooth DuPont: Smooth 3M: Sharp Agfa: Sharp
If your site complains that the images on film are too pixely, change the film quality from sharp to smooth.
RECONFIG: Run reconfig to make sure the camera, parameters & defaults are correctly set for your site. If you follow steps 1 through 4, above, you can save yourself a lot of headaches.
FILM QUALITY All cameras on the market provide various tweeking algorithms to match the film image quality to the display monitor image quality. Technologists & radiologists refuse to compromise the film quality. Top Priority: When the camera service vendor visits your site to setup the new CT/i port on the camera, please make sure the new films from the CT/i match the film quality established by the technologists and radiologist.
514
GEMS CT/i ANALOG FILMING INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS (VIDEO & SERIAL) Note: The ANALOG (VDB) video output specs and serial interface were specified from, and are the same as, the Genesis interface output specs. This does NOT apply to the CT/i digital (LCAM) filming interface.
TABLE 51 VIDEO OUTPUT (MEASURED INTO 75W AT BNC OUTPUT)
amplitude video setup sync DAC resolution diff. linearity glitch area rise/fall times FS settling time transfer function noise level DC offset
TABLE 52 PIXEL CLOCK OUTPUT
1 volt peaktopeak 0.643V +/10% 0.071V+/ 10% 0.286V+/ 10% 8 bits +/1 LSB max 80 picovoltseconds max, for any step size > 10 nsec, 10%90% 7.5 nsec typical to 1 LSB guaranteed monotonic > 5.0 millivolt peaktopeak, combined sync/async noise +/1VDC referenced to ground
logic family output low level output high level output period transition times
F series TTL 0.8VDC max 2.0VDC min 41.336 nsecs +/10% 10 nsec max, 10%90%
515
TABLE 53 VIDEO TIMING CHARACTERISTIC
Video Timing Characteristic pixel frequency pixel period horizontal line frequency horizontal line width horizontal active horizontal blanking horizontal front porch horizontal sync horizontal back porch vertical frame frequency vertical frame time vertical active vertical blanking vertical sync vertical back porch vertical front porch scanning format
TABLE 54 VIDEO DISPLAY FORMAT
60 HZ 24.192 Mhz 41.336 nsec 33.6 Khz 720 pixels 544 pixels 176 pixels 26 pixels 76 pixels 74 pixels 60 Hz 560 lines 524 lines 36 lines 3 lines 30 lines 3 lines noninterlaced
50 HZ 24.192 Mhz 41.336 nsec 33.6 Khz 720 pixels 544 pixels 176 pixels 26 pixels 76 pixels 74 pixels 50 Hz 672 lines 524 lines 148 lines 3 lines 86 lines 59 lines noninterlaced
visible field image field grayscale field grayscale grayscale off value initial grayscale border field border field value
544 pixels by 524 lines 512 pixels by 512 lines 32 pixels by 16 level grey bar on left side of image software selectable on/off 0 (black) 255 (white) at upper left corner 12 lines at bottom of visible field any 8bit value, software programmable
TABLE 55 HOST COMMUNICATIONS/CONTROL SERIAL PORT (ANALOG INTERFACE ONLY*)
interface 25D conn pinout baud rate word length parity type Note:
RS422 pin 8 (RX+), pin 21 (RX), pin 9 (TX+), pin 22 (TX), pin 7 (GND) 1200 baud 8 bit, 1 start bit, 1 stop bit even asynchronous *The CT/i digital DASM/LCAM serial control has standard RS232 on pins 2, 3, & 7.
516
TABLE 56
CT/i DISPLAY MONITOR VIDEO CHARACTERISTICS & TIMING PARAMETERS The following tables define the video signal timing for the CT/i image and operator display video outputs. Both channels have 1280 x 1024 RGB color at 72HZ, 1 Volt peaktopeak video at 75 ohms. Parameter Active Pixel Format Field/Frame Refresh Rate Pixel Clock Freq, Period Horizontal Freq, Period Horizontal Active Horizontal Front Porch Horizontal Sync Horizontal Back Porch Horizontal Blanking Vertical Freq, Period Vertical Active Vertical Front Porch Vertical Sync Vertical Back Porch Vertical Blanking 72 Hz Refresh 1280 x 1024 noninterlaced 72.239 Hz 129.25 MHz, 7.737 ns 12.998 usec, 1680 pixels 9.903 usec, 1280 pixels 0.232 usec, 30 pixels 1.083 usec, 140 pixels 1.780 usec, 230 pixels 3.095 usec, 400 pixels 13.843 msec, 1065 lines 13.310 msec, 1024 lines 38.99 usec, 3 lines 38.99 usec, 3 lines 454.93 usec, 35 lines 532.92 usec, 41 lines
Equalization Pulses Serration Pulses
yes (@horiz rate) no
Note:
If you connect anything to the monitor video, other than the display monitor, use good quality (low loss) 75 ohm video cables , and a high quality video splitter (example: Black Box Corp. #RGBSplit2). DO NOT use a BNC T connector; use a video splitter. Video Output Red Blue Green Video Level 0.714 Vpp 0.714 Vpp 0.714 Vpp Sync Level none none 0.286 volts Blanking Level 0.054 volts 0.054 volts 0.054 volts
517
APPENDIX 5B TOUCH SCREEN DEFAULTS

If the monitor touch screen does not work, verify the touch Setup menu contains the following values. If you select |Restore Defaults| during touch Setup, the touch screen will refuse to work until you restore the correct values, listed below. Correct Touch Configuration default values: Jitter Control Press Threshold Release Threshold Mouse Button 1 Emulation Mouse Button 2 Emulation Mouse Button 3 Emulation Serial Device Name Display Name Display Width Range Display Height Range
APPENDIX 5C APPENDIX 5D APPENDIX 5E APPENDIX 5F APPENDIX 5G APPENDIX 5H APPENDIX 5I APPENDIX 5J APPENDIX 5K APPENDIX 5L APPENDIX 5M APPENDIX 5N
Note:
8 5 3 Normal Shift Ctrl /dev/ttya2 :0.0 Low High Low High 0 1279 0 1023
518
CHAPTER 6 TABLE/GANTRY INTEGRATION
CHAPTER 6 CONTENTS
61 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Axial Enable and Gantry Door Switch Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Verify the OBC CTVRC or HEMRC Control Board JP1 Jumper Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Test HVDC (550) Enable Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651 Verify/Perform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Collimator Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661 Data Entry Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662 Verify/Perform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Check Alignment Light Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Internal Axial Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672 External Axial to Internal Axial Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673 Coronal Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Laser Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Alignment Light Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610 Intercom Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611 Tilt Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 Elevation Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613 Cradle Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614 Interference Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 Emergency Stop Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 6A Axial Encoder Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 6B Axial Brake Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 62 62 63 63 65 66 67 68 68 68 69 69 69 611 611 612 613 615 617 619 620 620
61
61
Introduction Use the Chapter 6 procedures to functionally check all parts of the table/gantry subsystem, except the high voltage generator. (You check the HV Generator in Chapter 7.) Note: Record the data you collect from this chapter onto form F4879X, located in Chapter 11 of this Installation Manual.
62
Required Tools Multimeter Scope (or Multimeter with Frequency Measurement Capability, such as the FLUKE 87.)
63
Axial Enable and Gantry Door Switch Test 1. Turn OFF the axial drive enable switch on the gantry display box. For the initial condition, do not leave the tube at the 6 oclock position.
2. Close the Gantry front cover. 3. Clear the Gantry area for rotation. 4. Press the table alignment light pushbutton. 5. Verify that the Gantry did not rotate.
t
7. Press the table alignment light pushbutton. 8. Verify that the Gantry rotates.
6. Turn ON the axial drive enable switch on the gantry display box.
t
10. Open the front gantry shroud.
9. Turn OFF the axial drive enable switch on the gantry display box.
11. Manually rotate the gantry a few degrees from the current position. 12. Turn ON the axial drive enable switch on the gantry display box. 13. Press the table alignment light pushbutton. 14. Verify that the Gantry did not rotate.
t
16. Close the Gantry front cover.
15. Turn OFF the axial drive enable switch on the gantry display box.
62
64
Verify the OBC CTVRC or HEMRC Control Board JP1 Jumper Position 1. Turn OFF the axial drive enable switch on the gantry display box. 2. Remove the OBC cover. 3. Locate jumper JP1, on the edge of the CTVRC Control board. (Second board from the top, in the OBC.) If this system contains the optional Performix Tube, the board will be called the HEMRC Control Board, but will have a similar jumper configuration. 4. Systems with PDU part #2133533, place JP1 in the NO DCRGS, or B position. 5. Replace the OBC cover. 6. Turn ON the axial drive enable switch.
t
65 Test HVDC (550) Enable Switch 1. Select |Service|
Service
2. Select |TROUBLE SHOOT|
TROUBLE SHOOT
3. Select |kV Loop|
kV Loop
63
4. Select |START|
. . . START. . . 5. On the High Voltage Functional Test screen that is displayed, change HVDC Bus Diff. Voltage selection to Normal, and change Test Duration to 10 seconds. 6. Verify all personnel have cleared the system, before you enable the HVDC (550). 7. Verify the following: a. PDU key switch enabled b. HVDC (550) enable switch on gantry status display box ON c. HVDC (550) ENABLE ON light on the gantry status display box ON.
8. Select |Run| If the system asks for a diagnostic download at this time, answer |YES|, and wait 90 seconds. Press the (Start Scan) button when prompted and it flashes, to begin the test.
9. Verify the HVDC (550) BACKUP CONTACTOR CLOSED LIGHT on the gantry status display box turns ON. 10. When the test finishes, verify the system displays the following message along the bottom of the High Voltage Functional Test screen: Diagnostics have completed with zero errors reported.
64
651
Verify/Perform 1. Turn off the HVDC (550) enable switch on the gantry status display box. 2. Select |RUN| to run the test again. 3. Verify the system displays the following message along the bottom of the High Voltage Functional Test screen: Test has aborted due to an error. See error log for more information. 4. Verify the message log contains the following error: Gentry I/O backup contactor error. Backup contactor pilot relay failed to energize on command. Relay K251 and K245 are energized. Check PDU and Gentry I/O. 5. Select |File|, |Exit| 6. Select |System Resets| 7. Select |RUN| 8. Wait 90 seconds for the message Scanning Hardware Reset Successful. to appear on the screen
65
66
Collimator Characterization 1. Select |SYSTEM INTEGRATION|
SYSTEM INTEGRATION 2. Select |START|
. . . START. . .
3. Select |Characterization|
Table/Gantry Installation
HV DC Enable Switch Characterization Power Supply Checks Collimator Rotor Verification
Dismiss
66
4. Select |Collimator Data|
File Mechanical Characterization Tool Hardware Reset Characterize
Help
Tilt Table Elevation Cradle

Data View Collimator Data
Charact Limits View Values View Log
6-6-1
Data Entry Hints Use the following method to quickly change the information in a Graphical User Interface (GUI) data field. You can use this method in any GUI that requires an update to existing information in a data field. 1. Highlight the current text in the field: a. Press and hold the left mouse button. b. Drag the cursor across the data to highlight it. 2. Press the [Backspace] key to clear the field. 3. Type the new data into the field, and press [Enter].
6-7
662
Verify/Perform 1. Verify, or type/enter, the collimator characterization values: If you loaded the System State MOD during Chapter 6, verify the collimator characterization values on the Mechanical Characterization Tool screen match the values on the collimator characterization label. or If you did not load System State MOD, type/enter the characterization values listed on the collimator characterization label.
2. Select |Continue| 3. If you entered new values, watch for the message which states the characterization successfully completed.
t
67 Check Alignment Light Position CAUTION
Verify all personnel have cleared the system. The Gantry rotates to 180 degrees during this check. 1. Press the alignment light button on the Gantry mounted controls, to position the gantry and turn on the lights. 2. Press the alignment light button on the Gantry mounted controls, again, to turn the lights off. 3. Turn OFF the axial drive enable and HVDC (550) enable switches on the gantry status display box. 4. Use the switch on the gantry control assembly, located near the collimator, to manually turn on the alignment lights. Access the switch through the opening in the center of the gantry, between the front and back shrouds.
WARNING
NEVER STARE DIRECTLY INTO THE LASER BEAMS WHEN YOU OPERATE THE ALIGNMENT LIGHTS. STARING INTO THE BEAMS CAN CAUSE PERMANENT EYE DAMAGE.
t
671 Internal Axial Lights
1. Place a sheet of plain white paper over the output port of each light. 2. Verify that the two lines line up on each other. Note: GE designed the internal axial lasers on the HiSpeed Advantage system to shine down on the collimator. Do NOT adjust the internal alignment lights at this time. The tomographic plane tests use the QA phantom, in Chapter 11, to check the internal axial lasers alignment to the collimator.
68
672
External Axial to Internal Axial Distance 1. Raise the table to its highest elevation. 2. Extend the cradle until you see both the internal and external laser lights shining on the cradle. 3. Place a metric rule on the right edge of the cradle, and measure the distance from the internal axial laser line to the external axial line. Verify this distance equals 310.0 mm +/ 1.0 mm.
4. Place the rule on the left edge of the cradle, and measure again. 5. Leave the cradle in its current position, and lower the table to the minimum elevation. 6. Measure the distance between the internal and external lights on both edges of the cradle, as above. Verify the distance remains equal to 310.0 mm +/ 1.0 mm.
t
673 Coronal Lights
1. Place a sheet of plain white paper at the left side of the patient opening, in front of the coronal laser light. Verify the two coronal lines coincide.
2. Move the paper to the right side of the patient opening. Verify the two coronal lines coincide.
3. Place the paper in the center of the Gantry opening. Use a level to verify that the coronal lines are horizontal.
t
68 Laser Warning Labels 1. Refer to Illustration 61.
2. Make sure the outside of the gantry labels are in the proper locations. 3. Obtain and install replacements for any missing labels.
69
ILLUSTRATION 6-1 LASER WARNING AND PRECAUTIONS
Note:
The laser assemblies, inside the gantry, have three laser radiation warning labels attached directly to the assemblies, or their power inputs. Note:
This label varies slightly for the 635nm laser.
LASER APERTURE DO-NOT-STARE
INTO BEAM
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM CLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM 670 MM LASER DIODE 1.0 MILLIWATT MAXIMUM OUTPUT CLASS II LASER PRODUCT
4. Close the front cover of the gantry.
6-10
69
Alignment Light Visibility HHS requirements state that any light used to define the tomographic plane must be visible under ambient light conditions, up to 500 lux. 1. Turn on the scan room lights to their brightest normal level. Do not add localized spot lights to increase the brightness level.
2. Raise the table to its highest position, advance the cradle into the gantry, and turn on the alignment lights. 3. Use your hand to check laser visibility: a. Center the back of your hand over the cradle, and position it over the table, until the external axial alignment light shines on it. b. Make sure you can see the axial alignment light, it doesnt matter whether or not you see the sagittal or coronal lights. 4. Use the back of your hand to check the internal axial alignment light visibility. 5. If you cannot see the external or internal axial lights on the back of your hand in ambient light conditions: a. Obtain a DIGAPHOT model #3300 or 3303 light meter. b. Measure the ambient light intensity at the cradle surface, in the external and internal alignment light locations. Note: Footcandles x 10.76=lux. If the light reading(s) exceed 500 lux, reduce the room lighting to 500 lux and repeat Step 3. and Step 4. or If the light meter readings equal 500 lux or less, replace the laser light(s) and/or their power supplies.
t
610 Intercom Check Make sure the intercom talk and listen functions work.
611
611
Tilt Characterization 1. Select |Tilt|

File Mechanical Characterization Tool Help
Hardware Reset
Characterize

Data View
Collimator Data Charact Limits View Values View Log
2. Follow the Tilt Characterization instructions displayed on the screen.
612
612
Elevation Characterization 1. Remove upper right and lower right table covers. 2. Locate the small Lshaped measurement block, stored on top of the bigger measurement block. a. Remove the small Lshaped measurement block from its storage position. b. Install it in its characterization position, at the right rear of the table. c. Move the measurement plate, on the right side of table, to the out position.
d. Tighten the mounting screws for both plates. 3. Select |Table Elevation|
Hardware Reset
Characterize

Data View
4. Follow the Elevation Characterization instructions displayed on the screen. Important: Take care to measure the exact elevation distances. Incorrect measurement will result in Elevation Characterization failure.
613
Note:
Refer to Illustration 62. Measure the elevation distance as vertically as possible. Measure between the bottom surface of the each measurement block and the center of the rear leg upper pivot pin. 5. Return the measurement plates to the storage position.
ILLUSTRATION 6-2 MEASURE ELEVATION DISTANCE
Rear leg upper pivot pin Center Line
Bottom Side
Weldment Plate LOWER POSITION DISTANCE = 14.7 INCHES (373.4MM)
Lower Position Distance: Measure between the center line of the rear legs upper pivot pin to the bottom of the rear measurement block.
Rear leg upper pivot pin
Center Line
Bottom Side
Weldment Plate
UPPER POSITION DISTANCE = 36.44 INCHES (925.6MM) Upper Position Distance: Measure between the center line of the rear legs upper pivot pin to the bottom of the right side measurement block.
6-14
6-13
Cradle Characterization 1. Select |Cradle|

Hardware Reset
Characterize

Data View
2. Follow the Cradle Characterization instructions displayed on the screen. IMPORTANT METAL FREE CRADLE CHARACTERIZATION INFORMATION: The following changes apply to the onscreen directions for alignment light and endofcradle position characterization steps, for tables equipped with the METAL-FREE cradle only. a. In the alignment light procedure (3rd and 4th screens), use the BLACK DOT on the cradle rightside bumper, instead of the black stripe, for both steps. Note: Elevate the table to at least 40mm from isocenter, so the black dot reaches the external scan plane alignment light before the cradle reaches its home position. b. In the end-of-cradle position procedure (5th screen), use the same BLACK DOT on the cradle rightside bumper, instead of the end of the cradle.
6-15
ILLUSTRATION 63 CRADLE CHARACTERIZATION PIN LOCATIONS

etc board
Cradle Characterization Pin Rear Characterization Location
Cradle Characterization Pin Storage Location (Under Front Cover) Cradle Characterization Pin Front Characterization Location
CT38886A
Gantry
616
614
Interference Test Reset the hardware to download the new characterization values to the ETC, OBC, and STC, before proceeding to the table/gantry interference test on this page. Note: If the following elevation and/or tilt display readings fail to meet specifications, DO NOT adjust the limit switches. Instead, recharacterize elevation and/or tilt. 1. Select |Hardware Reset|
Hardware Reset
Characterize

Data View
Collimator Data Charact Limits View Values View Log Note: Press only the fast pushbutton to display the elevation limits for the present elevation/tilt combination. 2. Move the cradle to the home position: a. Use the Down pushbutton to lower the table to the minimum height. b. Make sure the elevation display reads 577.5 +/ 3 mm. c. Use the Up pushbutton to raise the table to the maximum height.
d. Make sure the elevation display reads 25.5 +/ 3 mm.
617
Note:
Minus () tilt means the top of the gantry tilts away from the table. Plus (+) tilt means the top of the gantry tilts toward the table. 3. Advance the cradle about 36 inches from the home position. a. Tilt the gantry to 23 degrees. b. Use the Down pushbutton to lower the table until it automatically stops. c. Make sure the elevation display reads 119.5 +/ 3 mm.
d. Make sure the table clears the gantry covers by at least 1/2 inch. 4. Tilt the gantry to 20 degrees. a. Use the Down pushbutton to lower the table until it automatically stops. b. Make sure the elevation display reads 209.5 +/3 mm. c. Make sure the table clears the gantry covers by at least 1/2 inch.
5. Use the Up pushbutton to raise the table until the elevation display reads between 119.5mm and 209.5mm. a. Tilt the gantry to 10 degrees. b. Tilt the gantry away from the table; make sure it stops at 22.0 +/0 degrees. c. Tilt the gantry toward the table; make sure it stops at +18.5 +/0 degrees.
6. Return the cradle to home position. a. Make sure you can tilt the gantry to +/30.0 degrees. b. Leave gantry tilted to 30 degrees for now. 7. Raise the table until you can move the cradle. 8. Advance the cradle about 12 inches from the home position. a. Use the Home Button to return the cradle to the home position, tilt the gantry to 0 degrees, and lower the table to minimum height. b. Make sure you cannot move the cradle at table heights below 209.5 +/3mm. c. Maker the cradle Lock indicator lights on the gantry display.
9. Select |File, Exit| 10. Select |Dismiss| 11. Select |Cleanup|
618
615
Emergency Stop Check 1. Use the table pushbuttons to advance the cradle about 2 feet from the home position. 2. Press one of the XRAY DRIVES POWER OFF (Red) buttons on the gantry. 3. Make sure the XRAY DRIVES POWER shuts off, and the white button flashes. 4. Depress one of the table elevation buttons, to verify the emergency stop disabled table elevation. 5. Depress one of the cradle drive buttons, to verify the emergency stop disabled the cradle drive. 6. Press one of the flashing white buttons turn on XRAY DRIVES POWER. 7. Press the other XRAY DRIVES POWER OFF button on the gantry. a. Make sure the XRAY DRIVES POWER shuts off. b. Manually move the cradle to the home position to make sure the cradle clutch released. c. Make sure the cradle latches securely in the home position.
8. Press one of the flashing white buttons turn on XRAY DRIVES POWER. 9. Press one of the four table tape switches to make sure the XRAY DRIVES POWER shuts off. a. Turn on XRAY DRIVES POWER. b. Repeat with the three remaining table tape switches. 10. Press the console emergency stop switch, and make sure the XRAY DRIVES POWER shuts off. 11. Turn on XRAY DRIVES POWER.
t
Chapter 6 Complete
619
APPENDIX 6A AXIAL ENCODER CHECK

Axial Encoder Check 1. Turn the Gantry by hand, until it passes through the home flag. 2. Make sure the following LEDs toggle: a. DS270(CHA) and DS271(CHB) AX bd LEDs toggle. b. DS320(CHC) toggles on and off once during the time the DS321(home flag) remains lit.
APPENDIX 6B AXIAL BRAKE CHECK

Axial Brake Check 1. Toggle the axial drive enable switch on the status display box, and listen to the brake energize and deenergize. Note: If you reset the hardware since you turned on Gantry AC power, the brake may not toggle. If you dont hear the brake toggle, use the 120vac enable switch on the gantry status display box to turn gantry 120vac power off, then on. Now, you should hear the brake energize and deenergize when you toggle the axial drive enable switch on the status display box. 2. Verify the following conditions: a. When you turn off the axial drive enable switch, the switch pilot light extinguishes and the brake deenergizes. b. Make sure you can easily rotate the Gantry by hand. c. When you turn on the axial drive enable switch, the switch pilot light turns on, and the brake energizes.
APPENDIX 6C APPENDIX 6D APPENDIX 6E APPENDIX 6F APPENDIX 6G APPENDIX 6H APPENDIX 6I APPENDIX 6J APPENDIX 6K APPENDIX 6L APPENDIX 6M APPENDIX 6N
3. Turn on all three switches on the gantry status display box.
620
CHAPTER 7 DAS INTEGRATION
CHAPTER 7 CONTENTS
71 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711 Failure Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712 Special Handling Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7121 Antistatic Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7122 Cleanliness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713 Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Verify XRay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721 XRay Verification Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722 Advanced Features Channel, View and Box Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Check System Microphonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 7A HPDAS OFFSET AND NOISE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 711 Introduction Failure Protocol Follow standard troubleshooting protocol to verify all failures. Move boards, remove or move flexes, and repeat the test. Record all Board and flex moves on the DAS Board/flex tracking sheet. When you verify a failure, mark the defective part (attach a summary of the symptoms this failure caused, and how you determined this was the bad part), and remove it from the system. 71 71 71 72 72 72 72 74 75 76 710
After you swap boards or install new boards, allow about 3040 minutes of warmup time before you trust any test results. You can run DAS Quiz during warmup time to exercise the DAS. If you encounter failures in any section, restart the procedure at the DASQUIZ offsets and noise. 712 Special Handling Precautions DAS circuit cards are more sensitive to both STATIC DAMAGE and DIRT than any other circuit cards we now use. Please read sections 7121 and 7122, and observe the following precautions.
71
7121
Antistatic Handling You MUST wear a grounding wrist strap anytime you remove boards from the DAS or a conductive bag. NEVER place the DAS boards on nonconductive surfaces, such as white bench tops, Table cradle, plastic covered books or nonconductive plastic bags.
7122
Cleanliness Any dirt on the surface increases leakage current on the filter or converter cards and causes the DAS to fail the drift spec. Wear white cotton gloves when you handle the DAS boards, because fingerprints on the board can cause problems during humid conditions. Use only clean new gloves.
CAUTION
NEVER USE AN ERASER TO CLEAN ANY PART OF THE DAS.
713
Required Tools Ground Wrist Strap and AntiStatic Bags
72
Verify XRay This section uses XRay to test the DAS for opens, lows and shorts. System Configuration: Flex cables ON All covers ON Nothing in detector FOV
4. Select |SERVICE|
Service
SYSTEM INTEGRATION
72
6. Select |Diagnostic Data Collection|
Diagnostic Data Collection
7. Select |START|
. . . START. . .
8. Display the |Protocol Name| selection menu. 9. Select the XRay Verification protocol (xrayverif) by clicking on the protocol name, and then select |Load| to load the protocol. 10. Verify/Setup the following DDC parameters: STATIC XRAY ON 1 SECOND SCAN 1 SCAN 2 SECOND ISD 80 kV 40 mA CALIBRATION VECTOR NONE 10 mm APERTURE AIR FILTER SPOT SIZE SMALL OFFSET CORRECT 1:1 COMPRESSION FACTOR
11. Select |ACCEPT RX|, 12. Press (Start Scan) when it flashes. 13. Select |Dismiss| to close the DDC window. 14. Display the |System Integration| menu. 15. Select |Scan Analysis|
73
721
XRay Verification Analysis 1. Select the recently completed scan from the List Selection browser. 2. Select Means and St Devs

ILLUSTRATION 71 DISPLAY CHANNEL AND DATA VALUE
Two plots appear; Means on the top, and Standard Deviation on the bottom. Position the cursor over a channel (with no mouse buttons depressed) to display the corresponding the channel and data value.
Channel
Data
3. Verify no low or shorted channels exist. Note: Advanced plotting techniques are shown on the following page. 4. To close the plot: a. Move the mouse cursor inside the plot. b. Doubleclick the right mouse button. OR c. Select |Dismiss| to close the Scan List Select window.
d. Press the <ALT F3> keys to bring the window forward, if necessary. e. Select |Dismiss|
74
722
Advanced Features Channel, View and Box Reporting Analyze and Manipulate the plotted data:
ILLUSTRATION 72 ANALYSIS SOFTKEYS
Click here to expand the plot. Click here to shrink the plot.
Click here to move the plot up. Click here to move the plot down.
Click here for AutoScale. reset
1. Use the softkeys, displayed on the right side of the plot, to manipulate the graph data. 2. Move the cursor inside the plot to report channel data. 3. To close the plot: a. Move the mouse cursor inside the plot. b. Doubleclick the right mouse button.
75
73
Check System Microphonics Use this test to check the DAS for rotational noise, which could cause streaks or rings in images. 1. Power ON the DAS at least 2 hours before you run this test. 2. System Configuration: OBC cover ON FLEX cables ON DAS covers ON Power supply covers ON Heater controller ON
3. Select |TROUBLE SHOOT| 4. Select |DAS Tools|.
Troubleshoot
DAS Tools
Dismiss
76
5. Select |AUTO TEST|
DAS Tools
AUTO TEST
MANUAL TEST
SCAN ONLY TEST
POP NOISE TEST
MICROPHONICS TEST
AUXILIARY CHANNEL TEST
DAS ARCHITECTURE
VIEW LOG
VIEW SPECIFICATIONS
DISMISS
6. Select |ACCEPT|to run all of the DAS tests. This Test Takes Approximately 30 minutes.
77
DAS Tools
AUTO TEST
NUMBER OF PASSES PARALLEL LINK DC NOISE DC OFFSETS ANALOG ABSOLUTE ANALOG DIFF LINEARITY OFFSET DRIFT AUXILIARY CHANDIGITAL NELS TEST PATTERN POP NOISE
MICROPHONICS 0
REMAINING PASSES
0
TOTAL SUCCESSES
TOTAL FAILURES
MANUAL TEST
SCAN ONLY TEST
POP NOISE TEST
MICROPHONICS TEST
AUXILIARY CHANNEL TEST
30
30
DAS ARCHITECTURE
30
30 REMAINING
VIEW LOG
NUMBER OF REPETITIONS FOR GROUP

VIEW SPECIFICATIONS
1 200 128
1 ACCEPT
DELAY BETWEEN GROUPS (mSecs) # TEST FAILURES BEFORE STOPPING
128
DISMISS
STOP TEST S
7. Press the (Start Scan) button when it lights, to initiate the first scan. The system autoscans the remainder of the tests.
8. Observe the Total Successes and Total Failures columns. The columns update with each pass of each test.
9. If the Total Failures column lists any failures, troubleshoot before proceeding.
78
Note:
You cannot edit the Auto Test screen. While troubleshooting, you may run individual tests by selecting their name ( i.e. pop/noise, microphonics, aux channels ). You may also select MANUAL TEST, and enter the number of test iterations, and select such options as limits, rotor on/off, etc.
t
Chapter 7 Complete
79
APPENDIX 7A HPDAS OFFSET AND NOISE SPECIFICATIONS
DC Offsets With zero current input into all channels, the mean value of each output for HPDAS must be 4096 +/ 765 counts on single detector cell channels, and 4096 +/ 790 on double and triple detector cell channels. Noise
TABLE 71 SPECIFICATION LIMITS FOR DC OFFSETS AND NOISE
HPDAS DC OFFSETS CHANNEL RANGE 11 2 64 65 688 689 747 748 752 OFFSET COUNTS (MEANS) 4096 + 790 4096 + 790 4096 + 765 4096 + 790 4096+ 790
NOISE NOISE COUNTS 1.5 3.00 1.5 2.70 1.5 2.25 1.5 2.70 1.5 2.70
710
CHAPTER 8 GENERATOR CALIBRATION
CHAPTER 8 CONTENTS
81 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 mA Meter Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 New Tube Seed Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Calibrate HV Tank Feedback Resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861 Install HV Divider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862 Setup Instrumentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863 Calibrate the Cathode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864 Calibrate the Anode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Measure Total kV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Verify kV Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881 Remove the external HV Divider: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Auto mA Cal/XRay On Light Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810 KV Rise and Fall Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8101 Measure Rise Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8102 Measure Fall Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811 Verify Internal Scan Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812 Site Ground Leakage Current Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 8A Tube Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 8B Tube heat Soak and Seasoning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 8C Verify ma and kv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 83 84 85 87 88 88 89 89 811 813 814 815 816 817 818 820 821 823 826 829 835
81
81
Introduction Follow this procedure to check HV Generation Subsystem, including the Anode and Cathode HV Tanks, the Tube, and the mA and kV control boards. The flowchart in Illustration 81 provides a graphic overview of the HV Generation subsystem test.
ILLUSTRATION 81 CHAPTER FLOWCHART
Start
mA Meter Check New Tube Seed Shift* * skip if system tape provided
Calibration of HV Tank Feedback Resistors. Total kV Measurement kV Meter Verification
Auto mA Cal XRay ON Light Checks Rise & Fall Time Verify Internal Scan Timer
Site Ground Leakage Current Check
End
82
82
Required Tools System Software DVM Bleeder Scope Probetobleeder Cable 46219921G1 (If available) to minimize ripple on bleeder waveform or Use 30 feet of Belden #8422 cable (stock code 06762) 6 Feet Ground Wire (AWG12 MINIMUM) Scope GND Wrist Strap Spanner Wrench Torque Wrench Spanner Adapter Torque Wrench Adapter 1/2 Socket HV Dividertoscope Test Cable (2) 10 ft. High Voltage Cables, 3 Wire KVp Evaluation Tool, PN 2108232, located in an envelope attached to the outside of the Software Collector Box.
IMPORTANT: YOU MUST RECORD THE DATA COLLECTED IN THIS CHAPTER ON FORM F4879X, LOCATED IN CHAPTER 11 OF THIS BOOK. LOCATE THE HHS DATA, SENT FROM THE FACTORY, IN THE SOFTWARE COLLECTOR BOX. RETAIN THIS DATA WITH THE HHS DATA COLLECTED AT THE SITE.
83
83
Safety Precautions
DANGER
NEVER PLACE ANY PART OF YOUR BODY INTO THE GANTRY WITHOUT DISABLING THE AXIAL DRIVE AND VERIFYING THAT IT IS DISABLED. BOTH OF THE AXIAL DRIVE STATUS LEDS MUST BE OUT. DO NOT SERVICE THE GANTRY IF EITHER LED IS ON. FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL HARM, HARM TO OTHERS OR DEATH. BE SURE THAT YOU HAVE READ DIRECTION 46018302, CT HISPEED ADVANTAGE SAFETY GUIDELINE MANUAL OR HAVE VIEWED 46018308 SAFETY VIDEO TAPE PRIOR TO SERVICING THE GANTRY
ILLUSTRATION 82 AXIAL DRIVE STATUS AND CONTROL PANEL
AXIAL DRIVE STATUS LEDS
AXIAL LOOP CONTACTOR CLOSED
550 BACKUP CONTACTOR CLOSED
GANTRY 120VAC CONTACTOR CLOSED
GANTRY STATUS DISPLAY PANEL
AXIAL DRIVE ENABLE SWITCH AXIAL DRIVE ENABLE ON 550VDC ENABLE ON GANTRY 120VAC ENABLE ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
CAUTION: DISABLES TUBE COOLING
CT3529A
84
84
mA Meter Check 1. Select |SERVICE|
Service
SYSTEM INTEGRATION 3. Select |mA Meter Check|
mA Meter Check
4. Select |START|
. . . START. . .
5. Select |Accept| to begin the test, after the time delay expires. Once the test begins, the software enables the meter circuit for 4 seconds. Record the displayed Cathode and Anode mA values on FORM F4879X (located in CHAPTER 11), in the Circuit ON section of the mA Meter Check table. The Circuit ON values of the cathode and anode sides should read approximately 15 25 mA.
6. Select |Dismiss| when you have completed recording the values.
85
86
85
New Tube Seed Shift Note: If a system state MOD arrived with the gantry, skip the New Tube Seed Shift calibration. Use the following sequence to run a partial Install New Tube, and set the calseed values on a new system. 1. Select |SERVICE|
Service
2. Select |Replacement Procedures|
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES 3. Select |Install New Tube|
Install New Tube
4. Select |START|
. . . START. . . 5. The screen prompts you to confirm the displayed tube type. 6. Verify the installed and configured tube types match. 7. Press (Start Scan) when it illuminates, to automatically run the filament current seed shift program. ABORT the program after the filament current seed shift scans, and before ductility warmup
87
86 861
Calibrate HV Tank Feedback Resistors Install HV Divider 1. Switch off XRay and Drives power on the gantry. 2. Inside the Gantry: a. Switch OFF the HVDC (550) enable. b. Switch OFF the axial drive. c. Rotate the Tube to the 3 oclock position
d. Pin the Gantry. e. Switch OFF the 120vac Gantry power. f. Note: Refer to Illustration 83. Install the HV Divider between Tube and Tanks.
Place the HV Divider on a table or tube hoist, so the cables reach the tube. 3. Refer to Illustration 83. Add a ground wire (minimum size of AWG 12) from Tube ground to Bleeder ground. 4. Switch ON the 120vac Gantry power. 5. Switch ON the HVDC (550) enable. 6. Switch ON XRay and Drives power on the gantry. 7. Reset the hardware.
ILLUSTRATION 83 BLEEDER INSTALLATION GROUND WIRE
GRN
CATHODE CABLE TO GANTRY
CATHODE C 10 H.V. CABLES ANODE C1515A DIVIDER C G A A A C
ANODE CABLE TO GANTRY
TUBE
88
862
Setup Instrumentation Use an oscilloscope* with 10X probes: 1. Connect channel one to the anode output of the divider. Connect the scope ground to bleeder ground.
2. Connect channel two to the cathode output of the divider. Note: Connect the scope ground to bleeder ground.
In order to minimize bleederinduced ripple on the KV waveform, connect a 30 foot Belden shielded twisted pair cable between the scope probes and the bleeder. Refer to the Required Tools list, on page 83, for a more complete description of this cable. 3. Trigger channel one, positive, DC couple, trigger mode normal. 4. Channel one and two, 10v/div, time base 200ms. 5. Invert Channel two. *If possible, try to plug the scope into the table 120vac outlet, to reduce the noise on the scope waveforms. Use an extension cord if necessary.
Note:
Determine the type of kV board in the OBC. This procedure lists the names of components on the 46321064G1D kV board without brackets. This procedure lists the names of components on the 46321198G1 or 2143147 kV board in [brackets].
863
Calibrate the Cathode 1. Select |SERVICE|
Service
SYSTEM INTEGRATION
89
3. Select |Diagnostic Data Collection|
4. Select |START|
. . . START. . .
5. Display the |Protocol Name| selection menu. 6. Select the XRay Verification protocol (bleedersetup) by clicking on the protocol name, and then select |Load| to load the protocol. 7. Verify/Setup the following DDC parameters: STATIC XRAY ON 1 SECOND 1 SCAN FOCAL SPOT LARGE 100 KV 50 MA MONITOR ENABLE
8. Select |ACCEPT RX| The Computer Displayed reading spec for the Cathode kV and Anode kV equals 50 +/ 0.5 kV. Note: If you use scope cursors to window the trace, position the Left Vertical Cursor to the Right of the Rising Edge of the waveform. Position the Right Vertical Cursor to the Left of the Falling Edge of the Waveform.
810
9. Adjust the Cathode pot on the kV board, until the scope reading for the Cathode kV, and the displayed reading for the Cathode kV in the message log, fall within +/ 0.5kV of each other. 10. Use the pot, labeled CA [CAKV, R316], on the kV board, to adjust the scope reading. CCW decreases the scope kV. CW increases the scope kV. 1/2 turn equals approximately 0.5 kV.
11. Record the results on FORM F4879X (located in CHAPTER 11). 864 Calibrate the Anode 1. Select |SERVICE|
Service
SYSTEM INTEGRATION 3. Select |Diagnostic Data Collection|
4. Select |START| 5. Display the |Protocol Name| selection menu. 6. Select the XRay Verification protocol (bleedersetup) by clicking on the protocol name, and then select |Load| to load the protocol. 7. Verify/Setup the following DDC parameters: STATIC XRAY ON 1 SECOND
811
. . . START. . .
1 SCAN FOCAL SPOT LARGE 100 KV 50 MA MONITOR ENABLE
8. Select |ACCEPT RX| The Computer Displayed reading spec for the Cathode kV and Anode kV equals 50 +/ 0.5 kV. 9. If you use scope cursors to window the trace, position the Left Vertical Cursor to the Right of the Rising Edge of the waveform. Position the Right Vertical Cursor to the Left of the Falling Edge of the Waveform. 10. Adjust the Anode pot on the kV board, until the scope reading for the Anode kV, and the displayed reading for the Anode kV in the message log, fall within +/0.5kV of each other. 11. Use the pot, labeled AN [ANKV, R318], on the kV board, to adjust the scope reading. CCW decreases the scope kV. CW increases the scope kV 1/2 turn is approximately 0.5 kV.
12. Record the results on FORM F4879X (located in CHAPTER 11). 13. Display the Generator Characterization menu. 14. Toggle the softkey Monitor Enable OFF, so the message log no longer displays kV and mA readings.
812
87
Measure Total kV 1. Select |SERVICE|
Service
4. Select |START|
. . . START. . .
5. Display the |Protocol Name| selection menu. 6. Select the XRay Verification protocol (bleedersetup) by clicking on the protocol name, and then select |Load| to load the protocol.
813
7. Verify/Setup the following DDC parameters: STATIC XRAY ON 1 SECOND 1 SCAN FOCAL SPOT LARGE 100 KV 50 MA MONITOR ENABLE
8. Change the oscilloscope to add ch.1 and ch.2, to read total kV from the HV divider. 9. Channel one and two, 20v/div, time base 200ms, trigger ch. one, positive. 10. Select |ACCEPT RX| 11. Record the scope reading, and the Avg. kV displayed in the message log, in FORM F4879X (located in CHAPTER 11). 12. Display the Generator Characterization menu. 13. Toggle the softkey Monitor Enable OFF, so the message log no longer displays kV and mA readings.
t
88 Verify kV Meter
Use this procedure to verify the calibration of the internal kV metering circuits. 1. Select |SERVICE|
Service
SYSTEM INTEGRATION 3. Select |mA Meter Check| 4. Select |Accept| The test begins after the time delay expires.
814
Once the test begins, the software enables the meter circuit for 4 seconds.
5. Record the displayed Anode kV, Cathode kV and Total kV values in the FORM F4879X (located in CHAPTER 11) kV Meter Verification Circuit OFF and Circuit ON table. 6. Select |Dismiss|
t
881 Remove the external HV Divider: 1. Switch OFF XRay and Drives power on the gantry.
Press the Emergency OFF button on the Gantry Mounted Table controls.
or Press XRay and Drives OFF on the REM box.
2. Refer to Illustration 82 on page 84. Inside the Gantry: a. Switch OFF the HVDC (550) enable. b. Switch OFF the 120 Vac Gantry power. c. Remove the HV Divider between the Tube and Tanks (Illustration 83).
d. Reconnect the HV cables for normal operation. CAUTION Incorrect installation of anode and cathode HV cables can destroy the Performix tube! e. Reapply paper toweling around tube locking ring to absorb excess oil. f. Unpin the gantry.
g. Restore the OBC cover (to retain OBC boards during rotation.) h. Switch on the 120 Vac gantry power. i. j. Switch ON the the 550v enable. Switch ON the Axial Drive enable.
3. Switch ON XRay and Drives. Press the Reset button on the Gantry Mounted Table controls.
or Press XRay and Drives ON on the REM box.
4. Reset the hardware.
815
89
Auto mA Cal/XRay On Light Check Use this procedure to verify and complete Auto mA Cal on the system. If you have just run a Heat Soak and Seasoning, wait 30 minutes before you run the Auto mA Cal. Note: The system automatically warms up the tube. 1. Select |SYSTEM INTEGRATION|
SYSTEM INTEGRATION 2. Select |Auto mA Cal|
System Integration
Auto mA Cal
START
3. Press (Start Scan) when it flashes. 4. During this test, verify the XRay on indicators, located on the gantry display and the rear gantry shroud, illuminate when XRay is on. 5. Record the data on FORM F4879X. (located in CHAPTER 11). Note: If the system cannot complete the Auto mA Cal because HV aborts, follow the Heat Soak and Seasoning procedure in Appendix 8B , on page 829.
816
810
KV Rise and Fall Times Note: Determine the type of kV board in the OBC. This procedure lists the names of components on the 46321064G1D kV board without brackets. This procedure lists the names of components on the 46321198G1 or 2143147 kV board in [brackets]. 1. In the OBC, connect a scope to the KV board. Channel 1: Exposure Command EXCM, TP22 [TP5]. Scope ground to LGND, TP6 [TP3]. 2v/div Channel 2: Total kV KVTB, TP30 [TP11]. (At this test point KV = 20KV per volt.) Scope ground to AGND TP39 [SGND, TP12]. 1v/div
2. Set the Scope Time base to 200 usec. Positive or Negative trigger as required.
3. Select |SERVICE|
Service
817
6. Select |START|
. . . START. . .
7. Display the |Protocol Name| selection menu. 8. Select the XRay Verification protocol (Rise Fall (DDC)) by clicking on the protocol name, and then select |Load| to load the protocol.
TABLE 81 KV RISE AND FALL TIME RECORD TABLE
Technique kV 80 140 Note: mA 400 40
Rise Record Delay ms Test not required! Limit 0 +1.9 ms N/A Record Delay ms Test not required!
Fall Limit N/A 0 +0.5 ms
See pages 819 and 820 for measurement clarification.
8101
Measure Rise Time 1. Refer to Table 81. Verify/Setup the following DDC parameters: STATIC XRAY ON 1 SECOND FOCAL SPOT LARGE 80 KV 400 MA
Note:
Measure rise time only on the the 80kV/400mA scan. 2. Select |Accept Rx| 3. Select |Pause| after the start of scan, to prevent the scope from displaying the fall time. 4. After you record the rise time, select the |Resume| to initiate the fall time scan. 5. Record the delay between the rise of the EXCM signal, and the 75% threshold crossing of the selected kV (on FORM F4879X located in CHAPTER 11). Do not include the waveform overshoot. The 75% point for 80kV equals 60kV
Note:
Refer to page 819 for measurement clarification.
818

ILLUSTRATION 84 RISE TIME MEASUREMENT
RISE TIME EXAMPLE 80kV/400mA Ch.1 TP 22 EXCM [TP5] Names of components on the 46321198G1 or 2143147 kV board are shown on this page in [brackets]. Ch.2 TP 30 KVTB [TP11]
RISE TIME 75% OF SELECTED TECHNIC
0% XRAY
Note:
The 75% point for:
80kV equals 60kV 100kV equals 75kV 120kV equals 90kV 140kV equals 105kV
819
8102
Measure Fall Time 1. Refer to Table 81. Verify/Setup the following DDC parameters: STATIC XRAY ON 1 SECOND FOCAL SPOT LARGE 140 KV 40 MA
Note:
Measure fall time only on the the 140kV/40mA scan. 2. Record the delay between the fall of the EXCM signal, and the 75% threshold crossing of the selected kV (on FORM F4879X located in CHAPTER 11). Do not include the waveform overshoot. The 75% point for 140kV equals 105kV
Leave the scope connected for the next test.

ILLUSTRATION 85 FALL TIME MEASUREMENT
FALL TIME EXAMPLE 140kV/40mA Ch.1 TP 22 EXCM [TP5] Names of components on the 46321198G1 or 2143147 kV board are shown on this page in [brackets]. Ch.2 TP 30 KVTB [TP11] FAL L TIME
Note:
The 75% point for:
80kV equals 60kV 100kV equals 75kV 120kV equals 90kV 140kV equals 105kV
100% XRAY
75%
OF
SELECTED TECHNIC
820
811
Verify Internal Scan Timer 1. Select |SERVICE|
Service
4. Select |START|
. . . START. . .
5. Display the |Protocol Name| selection menu. 6. Select the XRay Verification protocol (Rise Fall (DDC)) by clicking on the protocol name, and then select |Load| to load the protocol. 7. Toggle the softkey |Monitor Enable| to ON, to display the scan time in the message log. 8. In the OBC, connect a scope to the kV board, as follows: a. Channel 1, Exposure Command (EXCM, TP22). Scope ground to (LGND, TP6) [TP3]. 2v/div
821
b. Channel 2, Total kV (KVTB, TP30) [TP11]. Scope ground to (AGND, TP39) [SIG, TP12]. 1v/div c. Set the Scope Time base to 200msec, positive trigger.
9. Use DDC to take a stationary, 1.0 sec, 0mm, 100kV, 40mA, Large Focal Spot scan. 10. Record the measured scan time from the oscilloscope and the displayed scan time from the message log. Spec limits are as follows: Note: Scope Exposure Duration = 0.96 to 1.04 s. Displayed Exposure Duration = 0.99 to 1.02 s. 11. Display the Generator Characterization menu. 12. Toggle the softkey Monitor Enable OFF, to stop the scan time display in the message log. Failure to turn the Monitor Enable OFF results in the system message log filling with exposure information.
13. Disconnect the scope from the kV board. 14. Replace the OBC cover.
822
812
Site Ground Leakage Current Checks
CAUTION
Turn OFF, tag and lock the wall power. Use an ECOS1023H, or equivalent device, to measure the ground leakage current present in the main system ground wire that connects the PDU cabinet to the wall ground. If the system has an 80 kVA isolation transformer, measure the ground leakage current in the ground wire that connects the 80 kVA isolation transformer to the wall ground.
CAUTION
TURN OFF, TAG, AND LOCK WALL POWER. BEFORE YOU DISCONNECT THE MAIN SYSTEM GROUND, TO INSTALL (OR REMOVE) THE ECOS1023H, TEMPORARILY INSTALL A GROUND JUMPER FROM THE WALL GROUND TO THE PDU (OR 80 KVA ISOLATION TRANSFORMER, IF PRESENT). NEVER ALLOW THE SYSTEM TO FLOAT, EVEN WITH THE POWER OFF. 1. Install the ECOS1023H in series with the main ground wire. 2. Remove the temporary ground jumper (see Caution, above) before you turn on the wall power. 3. Select |SERVICE|
Service
823
824
6. Select |START|
. . . START. . .
7. Display the |Protocol Name| selection menu. 8. Select the XRay Verification protocol (Ground Leakage) by clicking on the protocol name, and then select |Load| to load the protocol. 9. Verify/Setup the following DDC parameters: STATIC XRAY ON 4 SECOND SCAN 1 SCAN 2 SECOND ISD 120 kV 400 mA 1:1 COMPRESSION FACTOR CALIBRATION VECTOR NONE LARGE FOV 0 mm APERTURE BODY FILTER SPOT SIZE LARGE OFFSET CORRECT
10. Select |Accept Rx| 11. Make sure the ground current leakage, measured by the ECOS1023H, remains less than 5mA during the scan. 12. Turn OFF, tag and lock wall power. 13. Install the temporary ground jumper. (See the Caution statement at the beginning of this procedure) 14. Remove the ECOS1023H. 15. Remove the temporary ground jumper. SITE GROUND LEAKAGE CURRENT EQUALS <5 MILLIAMPS

Chapter 8 Complete
825
APPENDIX 8A TUBE USAGE
Tube Usage Statistics

Use the tubeUsage tool to display a list of currently viewable tube usage files. The system stores these files when you save the mechanical characterization. 1. Select |Trouble Shoot|
TROUBLE SHOOT
2. Select |Tube Usage|. 3. Select |START|. 4. The screen prompts: Tube to view:: Type 1 [Enter] to display the corresponding list of tube usage statistics. Type/enter Q to quit.
5. Select |Exit|.
826
ILLUSTRATION 86 TUBE USAGE INITIAL SCREEN
TubeUsage
Tube ---1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 c q Date Installed --------Tue Oct 17 23:37:45 1995 Wed Aug 16 15:03:45 1995 Fri Aug 4 18:39:29 1995 Thu Aug 3 00:37:20 1995 Fri Jul 29 17:19:41 1995 Thu Jul 27 01:21:03 1995 Thu Dec 23 11:36:46 1993 Thu Jul 8 11:38:19 1993 Cumulative Statistics Quit
tube to view : :
827
Tube
Date Installed
1 2 3 c q
Wed Oct 5 Fri Jul 29 Tue Jun 29 Cumulative Quit
20:06:11 1996 22:00:55 1996 20:42:02 1996 Statistics
Choose the tube # to display the following: tube to view: 1 Hospital: Name Address Suite RPXX2 Installed: Wed Oct 5 20:06:11 CDT 1996 Removed: Last Scan: Thu Jan 5 08:29:17 CST 1996 Housing Model #: 46309500G2 Housing Serial #: 89851EC0 Insert Model #: 46309300G2 Insert Serial #: 316778TU0 Failure Code: Mode: Patient Scans Number Slices: 52805 (total gantry rotations with XRay on) Number KW Slices: 89761 (count 1 slice for <=24kW, 2 slices for >24kW scans) KW Hours: 495.66 (total Kilowatt usage for an hour) Scan Seconds: 69785.19 (total number of seconds of scanning) (1) Mode: NonPatient Scans Number Slices: 8074 (total gantry rotations with XRay on) Number KW Slices: 8501 (count 1 slice for <=24kW, 2 slices for >24kW scans) KW Hours: 45.23 (total Kilowatt usage for an hour) Scan Seconds: 11302.74 (total number of seconds of scanning) After the first tube change with an RP1.4 software (or later release), the tube usage screen displays the following information: Mode: Patient Scans Number Slices: 52805 (total gantry rotations with XRay on) Number KW Slices: 89761 (count 1 slice for <=24kW, 2 slices for >24kW scans) KW Hours: 495.66 (total Kilowatt usage for an hour) Scan Seconds: 69785.19 (total number of seconds of scanning) (1) Mode: NonPatient Scans Number Slices: 8074 (total gantry rotations with XRay on) Number KW Slices: 8501 (count 1 slice for <=24kW, 2 slices for >24kW scans) KW Hours: 45.23 (total Kilowatt usage for an hour) Scan Seconds: 11302.74 (total number of seconds of scanning) Mode: Patient Scans Smart mA Number Slices: 52805 (total gantry rotations with XRay on) Number KW Slices: 89761 (count 1 slice for <=24kW, 2 slices for >24kW scans) KW Hours: 400.54 (total Kilowatt usage for an hour) Scan Seconds: 69785.19 (total number of seconds of scanning) (1) Mode: NonPatient Scans Smart mA Number Slices: 8074 (total gantry rotations with XRay on) Number KW Slices: 8501 (count 1 slice for <=24kW, 2 slices for >24kW scans) KW Hours: 45.23 (total Kilowatt usage for an hour) Scan Seconds: 11302.74 (total number of seconds of scanning) The Smart mA information duplicates the non Smart mA information, except the kW Hours indicate any reduction in power, due to SmartScan use.
828
APPENDIX 8B TUBE HEAT SOAK AND SEASONING
Tube Heat Soak and Seasoning Use this procedure on either an MX_165_CT_I tube, or an MX_200 tube. Run this series of scans on every new MX_165_CT_I tube, or MX_200 tube. You may also have to run this series on a tube that causes scan aborts or image streaks. Note: If your system has the Performix Tube option installed (MX_200), see the appropriate parts of this procedure for tube type selection. 1. Select |SERVICE|
Service
SYSTEM INTEGRATION 3. Select |Auto mA Cal|
System Integration
Auto mA Cal
START
829
4. Select |START|
. . . START. . .
5. Press (Start Scan) when it flashes. 6. Abort the scan sequence after the Ductility warmup completes. Note: If you have just completed the ductility warmup and auto mA cal, do not run the ductility warmup again, unless you allowed the tube to cool. 7. Select |SYSTEM INTEGRATION|
830
9. Select |START|
. . . START. . .
10. Display the |Protocol Name| selection menu. 11. If you have a MX_165_CT_I tube installed, select the Tube Heat Soak protocol (hsscti) by clicking on the protocol name, and then select |Load| to load the protocol. If you have a MX_200 tube installed, select the Tube Heat Soak protocol (hssgemini) by clicking on the protocol name, and then select |Load| to load the protocol. 12. Select |Accept Rx| 13. Verify that the scans to be performed during DDC are as shown in Table 82 on page 832 (MX_165_CT_I Tube), or as shown in Table 83 on page 833 (MX_200 tube). Note: Pass/Fail Criteria of the Heat Soak And Seasoning procedure: The MX165 and MX200 tubes have different pass/fail criteria for high voltage errors. Use criteria A, on page 832 for the MX165 tube. Use criteria B, on page 833 for the MX200 tube. To determine tube type either look at the ICD cards or from the Service Desktop select: |Utilities|, |Tube Display|, |Start|. 14. Select |FILE/EXIT| when complete.
831
TABLE 82 HEAT SOAK AND STABILITY PARAMETERS
MX_165_CT_l SCAN TABLE mA 300 200 300 300 200 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 Minimum ISD 2 5 1 12 7 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Number of Exposures 24 25 9 90 10 5 5 5 5 5 5 10 10 15 Exposure Duration 3 3 1 2 1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 Pre Group Delay Sec 2 3 2 12 7 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Scan Group Heat Input Anode Sk1 Anode Sk2 Casing Sk1 Casing Sk2 Seasoning 1 Seasoning 2 Seasoning 3 Seasoning 4 Seasoning 5 Seasoning 6 Seasoning 7 Seasoning 8 Seasoning 9
kV 80 120 80 80 120 90 100 110 120 130 135 140 145 150
Criteria A MX165 Pass/Fail Criteria When you run Tube Heat Soak and Stability, monitor the error log for high voltage overcurrents, shootthroughs and spits. If you encounter errors during the seasoning steps, immediately stop the series, and step back to the next lower KV seasoning cal series. Return to the failing station, and scan until error free. If the errors continue, repeat the process up to four times before you pull the tube. Upon completion of the high voltage stability test, retorque the locking ring on each H.V. cable (at the tube) to 7+1 ft. lbs. or 84 +12 in. lbs. Also, tape paper towels around tube locking rings, to absorb excess oil. Remove the paper towels after several rotations of the gantry.
832
TABLE 83 HEAT SOAK AND STABILITY PARAMETERS
MX_200_CT SCAN TABLE mA 300 320 320 270 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 Minimum ISD 2 5 3 16 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Number of Exposures 24 17 10 90 5 5 5 5 5 5 10 10 15 Exposure Duration 3 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Pre Group Delay Sec 2 2 2 60 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Scan Group Heat Input Anode Sk1 Anode Sk2 Casing Soak Seasoning 1 Seasoning 2 Seasoning 3 Seasoning 4 Seasoning 5 Seasoning 6 Seasoning 7 Seasoning 8 Seasoning 9
kV 80 100 100 100 100 100 110 120 130 135 140 145 150
Criteria B MX200 Pass/Fail Criteria 1. If at any time during this procedure there is a scan abort which is due to the tube (i.e max spit rate exceeded, anode overcurrent .......) the operator shall try to resume the test. If before completing this procedure there are more than three scan aborts then the test fails and the tube should be replaced. 2. During the seasoning steps the spit count for each scan shall be monitored and if: the spit count of either of the last two scans of each group exceeds 5 then repeat that group the spit count of either of the last two scans of each group exceeds 10 then backup to the previous group and restart if after 3 attempts to complete any scan group you are unsuccessful then the tube should be replaced. See Flow Chart, page 834.
833
MX200 Pass/Fail Criteria Flowchart
Start Heat Soak & Season
RUN Anode Soak 1 Anode Soak 2 Casing Soak
RESUME Scanning
n
Scan Abort
Scan Aborts >3
n
Seasoning Scan Group Previous Seasoning Scan Previous Seasoning Scan
n y
Scan Abort
Scan Aborts >3
y
Retries <3
n y
Spits / Scan >10 Replace Tube
A
y
n y
Retries <3
n
Spits / Scan >5
n n n
Last Group
Increment to Next Scan Group
y
Done
834
APPENDIX 8C VERIFY MA AND KV
Verify mA and kV
Use this procedure to verify the system currently meets kV and mA accuracies over the range of selectable technics. 1. Load the Exam Rx protocols from the DDC menu, or manually enter the scan parameters listed in the HHS form. (FORM F4879X located in CHAPTER 11). 2. To use the DDC menu protocols, select |SYSTEM INTEGRATION|
4. Select |START|
. . . START. . .
5. Display the |Protocol Name| selection menu. 6. Select the appropriate Protocol Name from the table below, and then select |Load| to load the protocol.
TUBE Type MX_165_CT_I MX_200
Small Focal Spot Protocol Name hhs_small_spot hhs_small_spot 7. Select |Accept Rx|
Large Focal Spot Protocol Name hhs_large_spot_MX_165CT_I hhs_large_spot_MX_200MCT
8. Press (Start Scan) when it flashes, to acquire the selected protocols.
835
If necessary, refer to the system Operator Manual for scan instructions.
9. Record the Computer displayed kV and mA at 5ms, Anode kV, Anode mA, Cathode kV, Cathode mA and Total kV in the corresponding Tables in FORM F4879X for the Large and Small focal spots. You may use a signed/dated hard copy printout in place of recording the data on FORM F4879X. The system also displays other nonHHS reportable kV/mA/scan time data on the display, as a part of a quality check. Any data accompanied by an asterisk* is out of spec, and has to be fixed.
t
APPENDIX 8D APPENDIX 8E APPENDIX 8F APPENDIX 8G APPENDIX 8H APPENDIX 8I APPENDIX 8J APPENDIX 8K APPENDIX 8L APPENDIX 8M APPENDIX 8N
836
CHAPTER 9 SYSTEM ALIGNMENTS
CHAPTER 9 CONTENTS
91 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Gantry Geometry Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Site Ground Current Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Plane of Rotation (POR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 XRay Beam on Detector Window (BOW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Isocenter (ISO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971 Acquire ISO Air scans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972 Acquire ISO pin scans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973 Analyze ISO scans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 974 Adjust Isocenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 CBF (Center Body Filter) and SAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981 CBF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982 ADJUSTING CBF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983 SAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 9A Radial Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IMPORTANT: 93 93 93 94 95 99 914 914 915 915 918 920 920 921 922 923
YOU MUST RECORD THE DATA COLLECTED IN THIS CHAPTER ON FORM F4879X, LOCATED IN CHAPTER 11 OF THIS BOOK. LOCATE THE HHS DATA, SENT FROM THE FACTORY, IN THE SOFTWARE COLLECTOR BOX. RETAIN THIS DATA WITH THE HHS DATA COLLECTED AT THE SITE.
91
ILLUSTRATION 9-1 SYSTEM ALIGNMENT OVERVIEW
A --Tube Change Process B --Detector Change Process
Site Ground Current Checks (9-4)
C --Collimator/Filter Change Process
POR (9-5)
(X-X) -- Paragraph #s in this chapter
BOW (9-6)
ISO (9-7) C
Fine ISO
CBF & SAG (9-8)
Detector Change N End
Radial Alignment (9-A)
9-2
91
Introduction The flowchart, Illustration 91, provides an overview of this chapter. Use the following procedures to make sure the XRay beam focuses directly upon the detector window.
92
Required Tools Beckman 3030 meter or equivalent Beckman CT231 clampon Amp probe: 46194427P228 (Fits up to #2 size wire) Beckman CT232 clampon Amp probe: 46194427P270 (Fits #1 size wire and larger) ECOS 1023H Power LineLeakage Current Tester (60HZ): 46194427P248 Adapter Cables for Power LineLeakage Current Tester: 46194427P249 Polaroid type 52 film Caliper Dial indicators Socket set 48cm Phantom Radial alignment tools Film developer Masking tape Torque wrench Dial indicator mount Radial dial indicator
Copy of FORM F4879X from Chapter 11 of this manual
93
Gantry Geometry Definitions Theta (Also known as ISO) Along the tangent to Gantry rotation, on the rotating structure. Move the XRay tube to the 180_ (6 oclock) position to equal 0_ Theta. You can adjust the tube unit and collimator in the Theta direction.
Z Axis Parallel to the axis of Gantry rotation, in the direction of cradle motion. You can adjust the tube unit and detector in the Zaxis direction. Positive Z Axis direction: Move the tube/detector toward the table Negative Axis direction: Move the tube/detector away from the table
Radial Along the radius, from the center of Gantry rotation, in and out from Gantry isocenter.
ILLUSTRATION 92 GANTRY GEOMETRY
You can adjust the detector in the Radial direction.
Note:
You cannot adjust the tube or collimator in the Radial direction. The Gantry design fixes this dimension.
Theta (ISO) Radial
Theta (ISO)
Detector Tube
Scan Plane
ZAxis
0 degrees Theta
93
94
Site Ground Current Checks Check the site ground current before you proceed to the System Alignments. Required Tools: Beckman 3030 meter or equivalent Beckman CT231 clampon Amp probe: 46194427P228 (Fits up to #2 size wire) Beckman CT232 clampon Amp probe: 46194427P270 (Fits #1 size wire and larger)
1. Power ON all equipment; NO XRay, and NO Gantry rotation. 2. Set meter range to the AC Current 2M switch position. Because the Amp probes equal 1000:1, the 2M range may give a 0.123 reading, which equals 123 milliamps.
3. Use the appropriate clampon probe to measure the ground current at the following locations. (Each location lists the maximum allowable current in parentheses.) A1 main system ground to PDU _________. (<300 mA) Operator Console #2 ground wire to Table Raceway _______. (<60 mA) Table #2 ground wire to Table Raceway. _________ (<40 mA) Gantry #2 ground wire to Table Raceway. _________ (<40 mA) PDU 1/0 ground wire to Table Raceway. _________ (<120 mA) Independent Console #2 ground wire to PDU. _________ (<60 mA) Second Independent Console #2 ground wire to PDU. _______ (<60 mA)
4. If any of these measurements exceed the specified maximum, use the System Ground Connection Illustration, located at the end of Chapter 2, in this Direction, to check the chassis ground. If you cannot resolve the problem, contact your District CT engineer for assistance.
94
95
Plane of Rotation (POR) This procedure checks and adjusts the plane of rotation of the XRay fan beam, to make it perpendicular to the axis of gantry rotation within 0.010 (0.25mm) across the largest reconstruction circle (48cm). This procedure offsets the fan beam to account for the slight shift that occurs with heating of the XRay tube. 1. Start this procedure with a cold XRay tube unit. If you acquired any low technique scans prior to beginning the Plane of Rotation, wait at least 5 minutes before you start this alignment procedure. or If you recently acquired image scans, and want to recheck the Plane of Rotation, wait at least 90 minutes, to allow the tube unit to cool. (Wait 90 minutes, if the tube unit had more than 25 Kilojoules exposure, [kV x mA x Sec 1000] within the last 30 minutes.)
2. Mount the phantom holder, and 48cm phantom on the cradle. 3. Refer to Illustration 93. Tape a type 52 film at the 3:00 oclock position on the outside edge of the 48cm phantom, so the film projects into the Gantry. Orient the side of the film marked This side toward lens towards isocenter. When exposed and developed, the film shows the alignment of the two beams with the table, at the left, as viewed from the XRay tube in the 3:00 oclock position.
4. Advance the cradle, and use the alignment lights to position the film for an exposure near the image center mark on the film pack. 5. Display the Service Desktop: a. Select |Service| b. Select |Replacement Procedures| c. Select |Diagnostic Data Collection| (DDC)
d. Select |Protocol Name| e. Select |ta_por_10mm|Select |load| f. Check Run Description Tube Align POR 10mm
g. Select |Accept Rx| h. Press the (Start Scan) Enable Button when it lights i. Select |Dismiss|
6. Remove the film, mark the table side of the film, and develop it. 7. Refer to Illustration 93. Verify that the narrow (white beam) exposure lies within the wider (gray) XRay exposure.
95
ILLUSTRATION 93 PLANE OF ROTATION
FILTER Body
APERTURE 10mm XF 0.23
KVP
mA
SCAN SPEED 4 sec. XF 0.07
XRay ON 0
XRay OFF 360 XR 0.23
80 40 XR 0.07
NARROW BEAM TUBE AT 270_ THETA Adjust Tube in the Table direction (BAD POR) NARROW BEAM TUBE AT 90_ THETA 48cm PHANTOM Adjust Tube in the Gantry direction (BAD POR) TAPE FILM HERE
GANTRY TAPE FILM HERE TABLE
ct2721
96
8. Examine the edges of the two exposures in the Z direction. Both edges of each beam should be equally welldefined by the exit slit of the collimator, with the edges of the narrow beam much sharper than the wide beam. If a difference in edge definition exists, check for gross Z misalignment. (Misalignment of the slit in the tube collimator adapter may cause the fuzzy edge.)
9. Refer to Illustration 93. Measure the 10mm exposure to determine the plane of rotation. a. Use a Vernier Caliper or comparable instrument with mm, or inch, scale to measure the widths of the wide beam that extend past the edges of the narrow beam. b. Call these dimensions XF (front distance) and XR (rear distance). The difference in center lines between the wide and narrow beam equals: (XFXR) 2. 10. To meet the cold tube conditions and maintain the perpendicularity specification of the fan beam: HSA TUBE: XF must be slightly less than XR (XFXR) 2 must fall in the range of 0 to 0.010I (0 to .25mm)
PERFORMIX TUBE: XF must be slightly greater than XR (XFXR) 2 must fall in the range of 0 to +0.010I (0 to +.25mm).
11. To calculate the amount of required movement: Note: Take the difference between XF XR; add 0.02; then multiply by 0.26 to determine the amount of tube shift. Tube shift=(XFXR+ 0.02) .26
A positive tube shift value means move the tube toward the table. A negative tube shift value means move the tube away from the table. 12. To adjust the tube: a. Barely loosen the large circular knurled nut. b. Loosen the four (4) mounting bolts located on the Gantry/Tube mounting bracket. c. Reposition tube, and tighten the bolts and nut.
Recommended: Install a dial indicator on the bracket attached to the collimator mounting bracket and bearing, on the adjacent Gantry surface. Zero the indicator before you loosen the mounting bolts, then observe the amount of indicator shift as you loosen the mounting bolts. Take this shift into consideration when you adjust the tube, so you obtain the correct adjustment distance after you tighten the mounting bolts.
97
13. If the 10mm beam exposure did not meet specification: Once you have adjusted the tube by the required amount, wait 5 minutes, and repeat steps 3 through 12. HSA TUBE: Measure the exposure. Verify that (XFXR) 2 = 0 to 0.01 (0 to .25mm). Wait 5 minutes, then proceed to the 1.0mm aperture exposure.
PERFORMIX TUBE: Measure the exposure. Verify that (XFXR) 2 = 0 to +0.01 (0 to +.25mm). Wait 5 minutes, then proceed to the 1.0mm aperture exposure.
14. Display the Service Desktop: a. Select |Service| b. Select |Replacement Procedures| c. Select |Diagnostic Data Collection| (DDC)
d. Select |Protocol Name| e. Select |ta_por_1mm| Select |load| f. Check Run Description Tube Align POR 1mm
g. Select |Accept Rx| h. Press the (Start Scan) Enable Button when it lights i. Select |Dismiss|
15. Remove the film, mark the table side of the film, and develop it. 16. Inspect the resulting film: (You do not have to measure the beam widths.) Make sure you can see the edges of the wide beam on either side of the narrow beam
17. When the Plane of Rotation meets specification, tighten the four tube mounting bolts to a torque of 25 +2 ft. lbs. Note: Handtighten the circular knurled nut to prevent the Z adjust lever from rattling loose. 18. Record the completion of POR on FORM F4789X.
98
96
XRay Beam on Detector Window (BOW) This procedure checks and adjusts the position of the detector window so that it intercepts the entire width of the XRay fan beam under worst case conditions. This procedure offsets the beam to account for the fan beam shift toward the table that occurs with heating of the XRay tube.
WARNING WARNING
THE GANTRY CONTAINS ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL HAZARDS. MAKE SURE YOU TURN OFF BOTH THE LOOP CONTACTOR AND GANTRY HVDC (550) ENABLE SWITCH BEFORE YOU ACCESS THE GANTRY. ALSO, MAKE SURE YOU READ DIRECTION 46018302, CT HISPEED ADVANTAGE SAFETY GUIDELINES MANUAL, OR VIEW THE 46018308 CT HISPEED ADVANTAGE SAFETY VIDEO, PRIOR TO SERVICING THE GANTRY SUBSYSTEMS. 1. Start this procedure with a cold XRay tube unit. If you acquired any low technique scans prior to beginning the Beam on Window test, wait at least 5 minutes before you start this alignment procedure. or If you recently acquired image scans, and want to recheck the BOW, wait at least 90 minutes, to allow the tube unit to cool, if the tube unit had more than 25 Kilojoules exposure, [kV x mA x Sec 1000] within the last 30 minutes.
2. Remove any objects from the the Detector Field of view. 3. Turn ON the Gantry Loop Contactor switch. 4. Display the Service Desktop 5. Select |Replacement Procedures| 6. Select |Diagnostic Data Collection| 7. Select |Position Tube|, and position the tube to 0 degrees. a. Type 0 degrees in the tube position data field, and press [Enter]. b. When the message Is Gantry clear? appears, remove any objects from the gantry opening, and select |Yes|. 8. Turn OFF the Gantry Loop Contactor switch. 9. Turn OFF the Gantry HVDC (550) Enable switch.
99
10. Make sure the XRay tube remains in the 0 degree (gantry 12 oclock) position. 11. With the detector at the 6 oclock position, place three pieces of Polaroid film on the detector, as shown in Illustration 94. Orient the film with the side marked, This side toward lens, toward the detector.
12. Butt the films metal strip tightly against the rotating base of the gantry. 13. Make a small pencil mark on both sides of the film, at the edge of the detector window closest to the table. 14. Note the position of each film, and remove all three pieces of film. a. Press heavily on the film, and draw a line between the marks you made on the film. b. This line must show on the film after you develop it. 15. Return the films to their positions on the detector. a. Verify the pencil marks align with the detector window. b. Secure the films with masking tape. 16. Turn ON the Gantry Loop Contactor switch. 17. Turn ON the Gantry HVDC (550) enable switch. 18. Select |DDC Protocol|. 19. Select |Name of Protocol| Select |ta_bow| Select |load| 20. Check Run Description Tube Align BOW 21. Select |Position Tube|. a. Type 0 in the tube position data field, and press [Enter]. b. When the message Is Gantry clear? appears, remove any objects (except films) from the gantry opening, and select |Yes|. 22. Select the |Start Scan| softkey, when prompted. 23. Select |Dismiss| 24. After the scan completes, remove and develop the films. Mark the films to remember their relative positions. (R/L or Center) 25. Refer to Illustration 94. Draw two additional lines on the exposed films: a. Draw one line exactly 1/16 inch (1.6mm) from the first line that you scribed on the film package in step 14., in the direction of the gantry. This is called Original Line in Illustration 94. b. Draw another line exactly 1.24 (31.5mm) from the second line, in the direction of the gantry. This is called Second Line in illustration 94. 26. The center of the XRay beam must reside toward the gantry for the HSA tube or toward the table side for the PERFORMIX tube, on the detector window. HSA TUBE: The xray beam center (CL EXPOSURE) must fall within 0.00472 inches to 0.03465 inches (0.12 to 0.88 mm) of the detector window center, but displaced toward the Gantry, as shown in Illustration 94. PERFORMIX TUBE: The xray beam center (CL EXPOSURE) must fall within 0.00472 inches to 0.03465 inches (0.12 to 0.88 mm) of the detector window center, but displaced toward the Table side, as shown in Illustration 94.
910
27. Use a vernier caliper, or pocket comparator with mm or inch scale reticle, to measure the difference between these center lines. a. Measure the two edges between the exposure and the window. b. For dimensions, XF (front) and XR (rear) the center line difference equals: (XF XR) 2. 28. Use the following formula to see if the BOW meets specification: HSA TUBE: XF XR = 0.06 0.030 inches or XF XR = 1.0 0.8 mm PERFORMIX TUBE: XF XR = 0.06 0.030 inches or XF XR = 1.5 0.8 mm
911
ILLUSTRATION 94 POSITION FILM FOR BEAM ON WINDOW
A B EXPOSURE A = HSA TUBE B = PERFORMIX TUBE
912
29. Refer to Illustration 95. To adjust the detector: a. Loosen all three detector mounting nuts, even if you plan to adjust only one or two. (Bring the inside large nut back to finger tight.) b. Loosen the adjustment locking nuts only on the mounts which require adjustment. c. Note: Use the locking nut flats as a reference, and turn the mounting studs by the specified number of flats, to bring the detector into alignment.
Turn the mounting studs CW to move the detector toward the Gantry d. Hold the adjustment stud with a wrench, and retighten the adjustment locking nut. e. Retighten the detector mounting nuts. Torque each of the inside detector mounting nuts to 25 ftlbs. Hold the lower mounting nut, to prevent it from turning, while you tighten the outside nut to 25 ftlbs.
CAUTION
Do not overtighten the mounting nuts. Because the detector no longer has shocks, excess force can twist and damage it.
30. Record the BOW result on FORM F4879X.
t
ILLUSTRATION 9-5 DETAIL OF MOUNTING/ADJUSTMENT HARDWARE BOW ADJUSTMENT LOCK NUT
BOW ADJUSTMENT
DETECTOR MOUNTING NUTS
ROTATIONAL ADJUSTMENT CAM ALLEN HEAD ROTATIONAL ADJUSTMENT SCREW
ALLEN HEAD ROTATIONAL LOCKING SCREW
ALLEN HEAD ROTATIONAL ADJUSTMENT SCREW
DETECTOR MOUNTING NUTS
ROTATIONAL ADJUSTMENT CAM
ct2775
9-13
97
Isocenter (ISO) This procedure aligns the tube focal spot with the detector center. Start this procedure with a cold XRay tube unit. If you acquired any low technique scans prior to beginning the Isocenter test, wait at least 5 minutes before you start this alignment procedure. or If you recently acquired image scans, and want to recheck the ISO, wait at least 90 minutes, to allow the tube unit to cool. (Wait 90 minutes, if the tube unit had more than 25 Kilojoules exposure, [kV x mA x Sec 1000] within the last 30 minutes.)
971
Acquire ISO Air scans Acquire two ISO Air Scans (Lg & Sm focal spots) from the DDC menu. 1. Display the Service Desktop 2. Select |Replacement Procedures| 3. Select |ISO Alignment| 4. Select |ISO Align Large (DDC)| 5. Check Run Description Tube Align ISO large 6. Select |Accept Rx| Press (Start Scan) when it lights. RECORD Large Spot AIR SCAN# Exam_______Series_______Image_______ Note: The Exam and Series numbers will be visible during the scan. The image number will flash for a moment at the end of the scan. If you have the Exam & Series #s, the Image # is easily determined prior to the calculation(s). 7. Select |Dismiss| to exit DDC. 8. Select |ISO Align Small (DDC)| 9. Check Run Description Tube Align ISO small 10. Select |Accept Rx|Press (Start Scan) when it lights. RECORD Small Spot AIR SCAN# Exam_______Series_______Image_______ 11. Select |Dismiss| to exit DDC.
914
12. After the system acquires the ISO air scans: a. Follow the proper safety protocol to access the Gantry b. Attach a round, 1/8 diameter metal shaft (3.175 mm shaft diameter) to the end of the table nearest the Gantry, or on phantom holder. c. Turn ON the laser alignment lights.
d. Advance and adjust the table to position the metal shaft 1.4 up and 1.4 right of isocenter. e. Make sure the shaft remains level (perpendicular to the scan plane.) Note: IMPORTANT: Always use a round 1/8 diameter metal shaft. Never position the metal shaft directly on ISO center, always offset it. The Software program that calculates tube movement for ISO Center looks for a Sinusoidal waveform generated by the offcenter metal shaft. A metal shaft, positioned at Isocenter, generates a waveform consisting of a straight line. 972 Acquire ISO pin scans Acquire 2 ISO pin scans (Lg.& Sm. focal spots) from the ISO Alignment menu. 1. Display the Service Desktop. 2. Select |Replacement Procedures| 3. Select |ISO Alignment| |Start| 4. Select |ISO Align Large (DDC)| 5. Check Run Description Tube Align ISO large. 6. Type/enter PIN LARGE in the scan description data field. 7. Select |Accept Rx| Press (Start Scan) when it lights. RECORD Large Spot PIN SCAN# Exam______Series______Image______ Note: The Exam and Series numbers will be visible during the scan. The image number will flash for a moment at the end of the scan. If you have the Exam & Series #s the image# is easily determined prior to calculation(s). 8. Select |Dismiss| to exit DDC. 9. Select |ISO Align Small (DDC)| 10. Check Run Description Tube Align ISO small. 11. Type/enter PIN SMALL in the scan description data field. 12. Select |Accept Rx| Press (Start Scan) when it lights RECORD Small Spot PIN SCAN# Exam______Series______Image______ 13. Select |Dismiss| to exit DDC. 973 Analyze ISO scans 1. Select |Replacement Procedures| |ISO Alignment| |Start| 2. Select |ISO Align| (get scan) 3. Identify the Four scans just taken. If the Image #s are unknown, they will be the last four images in the Exam & Series #s recorded previously.
915
4. Select the first of the four scans. (This is the Large Spot Air scan.) 5. Select |Save Scan Data| of this scan file recorded in previous steps. Note: When the images are saved, each one is put into the directory /data/ and given a different identification number. When the number is displayed, record it for use in ISO calculations, select |Continue| and repeat for the other three scans. Refer to the following chart for an example:
Exam/Series/Image (EXAMPLE) Large Spot Air Scan = 65101/2/11
Saved File Name (EXAMPLE) /data/iq.CT01.65101.2.11.hdr.23003.scan
Small Spot Air Scan = 65101/2/12 Large Spot pin Scan = 65101/2/13 Small Spot pin Scan = 65101/2/14
/data/iq.CT01.65101.2.12.hdr.23004.scan /data/iq.CT01.65101.2.13.hdr.23005.scan /data/iq.CT01.65101.2.14.hdr.23006.scan
This important number is assigned randomly by computer ^^^^^^
6. Select |Dismiss| 7. Select |ISO Align| (process) 8. For Help message showing proper syntax & format, type/enter iso_calc) 9. Type/enter [ CASE SENSITIVE ] iso_calc airscan /data/[Large spot air scan#] i /data/[Large spot tool scan #] EXAMPLE From previous chart
iso_calc airscan /data/iq.CT01.65101.2.11.hdr.23003.scan i /data/iq.CT01.65101.2.13.hdr.23005.scan
Note:
If everything was typed accurately, the ISO Center channel values will be reported on the first line of the report posted to the monitor screen. The amount that the tube should be moved up or down is given on successive lines in this report. 10. RECORD CENT_AVERAGE for Large Spot =________________________ 11. Repeat the ISO calculations using the files for the small spot. iso_calc airscan /data/[Small spot air scan#] i /data/[Small spot tool scan #] EXAMPLE From previous chart
iso_calc airscan /data/iq.CT01.65101.2.12.hdr.23004.scan i /data/iq.CT01.65101.2.14.hdr.23006.scan
12. RECORD CENT_AVERAGE for Small Spot =________________________ Note: If the distance between the large and small focal spots exceeds 0.16 channels, replace the tube.
916
13. Refer to Section 974, for tube movement instructions. 14. Rescan the ISO air and pin scans (Section 971 and Section 972) until the tube meets the ISO specifications. Note: The system ISO specification equals the average of the large and small ISO values. This value should equal 373.75 +0.02 channels. 15. Enter the saved focal spot alignment values. Note: ISO center values are used during image construction, therefore, this step is required for proper system operation.
CAUTION
This section presumes you know how to use the jot text editor. Misuse of jot can seriously corrupt configuration files, which in turn causes severe system problems. 16. Open or go to a UNIX shell window.
-- or -Select [Replacement Procedures] --- [ISO Alignment] --- [ Start] --[ISO Align(Update scanhardware.cfg)] 17. Go to the config file directory: cd /usr/g/config <Enter> 18. Edit the scanhardware config file: jot scanhardware.cfg <Enter> Note: Type filename exactly as indicated or the jot editor will display a blank screen. If this happens, Exit jot from the menu bar and retype the command. 19. Scroll Down until you find the isoSmallSpot and isoLargeSpot values. 20. Change the values to the final values for ISO that you recorded. 21. Select File on jots menu bar and Save to save the changes to the file. 22. Select File on jots menu bar and Exit to get out of jot. 23. The following command will copy and overwrite the current ScanHardware config file on the sbc: rcp scanhardware.cfg <suitename>_sbc:/usr/g/g_config/ScanHardware. cfg <Enter>
ATTENTION
The file that resides on the OC computer does not contain any CAPITAL letters: scanhardware.cfg When it is copied to the SBC computer both the S and the H are CAPITALIZED. ScanHardware.cfg jot does not reside on the sbc computer...!
9-17
974
Adjust Isocenter Note: Whenever the CRT display shows that your ISO exceeds 373.75 +/ 0.1 channels, you must create a new small and large AIR CAL (rerun AIR and PIN scans), once you have adjusted the tube position. If the calculated ISOCENTER value does not meet specification, adjust the tube unit by the amount displayed on the CRT. As an example, if the system reports: Cent_AVERAGE: (Up and Down values will be given) Cent_down .055 (DOWN in the negative direction means move the tube UP.) Cent_up .055 (UP in a positive direction means move the tube UP.) In the above example, the tube must be moved UP by .055. CAUTION: Both the Large and Small focal spots must be calculated and averaged prior to any movement. 1. Use a dial indicator gauge capable of measuring 0.001 inch to 0.250 inch (example: Starrett #25141), attached to a nonmagnetic holding fixture, and bolt the gauge and its holding fixture to the special tube mounting bracket. 2. Zero out the gauge before you loosen the tube mounting bolts. 3. Loosen the four mounting bolts (9/16) that fasten the tube unit to the Gantry mounting plate. 4. Loosen the top 3/4 inch nut on the vertical adjustment screw. 5. Move the tube in the recommended distance and direction, as measured by the ISOCENTER gauge (i.e. DIAL INDICATOR). Turn the vertical adjustment screw clockwise to move the tube up. Turn the vertical adjustment screw counterclockwise to move the tube down.
6. Tighten the tube mounting bolts, and torque to 25 +/ 2 ft. lbs. 7. Repeat ISO Scans until the ISOCENTER meets the specification. Note: If ISO falls outside 373.75 +/ 0.1 channels, you do not have to wait between tube adjustment and the test scan. If ISO projects between +/0.02 and +/ 0.1 channels, wait 5 minutes after you adjust the tube before you scan. If ISO projects within 373.75 +/0.02 channels, wait 5 minutes then repeat the scan to verify the results remain within spec.
918
8. Wait 5 minutes, then recheck POR with the 10mm aperture, to verify the plane of rotation remains unchanged. If the plane of rotation appears to change, DO NOT adjust the tube. Wait 30 minutes and repeat the POR check. If the second check also shows a change in POR, adjust the tube to bring it into specification, and check the XRay beam to Detector Window and ISO Alignments to make sure they still meet spec. ISO does not affect the detector Radial Alignment. You must always finish the tube alignments with ISO.
9. Record the final ISO value on FORM F4879X.
919
98
CBF (Center Body Filter) and SAG This procedure aligns the center of the body filter, coincident with isocenter alignment, and measures the change in alignment during a rotating scan. It reports the peak amplitude difference in channel numbers, as well as the hysteresis, or difference in channel numbers between first and last views of a scan.
981
CBF 1. Move the table out of the detector field of view. Make sure nothing obstructs the attenuation of the XRay beam to detector window.
2. Display the Service Desktop. 3. Select |System Integration| 4. Select |CBF & SAG Alignments| |Start| 5. Select |CBF and SAG Align ( DDC )| 6. Check Run Description Tube Align CBF. 7. Select |Accept Rx| Press the (Start Scan) button when it lights. Note: The system will take two scans, one air and a scan with the filter in place. RECORD Large Spot AIR SCAN# Exam______Series_______Image_____ RECORD CBF & SAG SCAN# Exam______Series_______Image_____ 8. Select |Dismiss| to exit DDC. 9. Select |CBF Align| ( get Scan ) 10. Identify the Two scans just taken. If the Image #s are unknown, they will be the last Two images in the Exam & Series #s recorded previously. 11. Select the first of the Two scans. (This is the Large Spot Air scan.) 12. Select |Save Scan Data| of this scan file recorded in previous steps. Note: When the images are saved, each one is put into the directory /data/ and given a different identification number. When the number is displayed, record it for use in CBF & SAG calculations, select |Continue| and repeat for the other scan.
Exam/Series/Image (EXAMPLE) Large Spot Air Scan = 65101/2/15
Saved File Name (EXAMPLE) /data/iq.CT01.65101.2.15.hdr.23007.scan
CBF & SAG Scan
= 65101/2/16
/data/iq.CT01.65101.2.16.hdr.23008.scan
This important number is assigned randomly by computer ^^^^^^
13. Select |Dismiss| 14. Select |CBF Align| ( Process ) 15. Type/enter cbf_calc (to display a Help message showing proper syntax & format)
920
16. Type the boldface character string, and substitute your own Exam/series/image for the example shown: (CASE SENSITIVE) cbf_calc airscan /data/[Large spot air scan#] i /data/[CBF & SAG scan #] EXAMPLE From previous chart
cbf_calc airscan /data/iq.CT01.65101.2.15.hdr.23007.scan i /data/iq.CT01.65101.2.16.hdr.23008.scan
The system displays the average centroid value for the CBF, along with collimator movement ( in mm ) recommendations, if any. (Up and Down values will be given) (DOWN in the positive direction means move the Collimator DOWN.) (UP in a negative direction means move the Collimator DOWN.)
Cent_AVERAGE: Cent_down .048 Cent_up .48
In the above example the Collimator must be moved DOWN by .048 mm. Note: To convert mm into inches: Multiply the displayed value in mm by 0.03937 = value in inches ( or Divide by 25.4 to get value in mm ) 17. RECORD: CENT_AVERAGE Value=_____________________________ 18. If the calculated CBF value does not meet specification (373.75 +/ 0.2), adjust the collimator by the amount displayed on the CRT. 982 ADJUSTING CBF 1. Wait 5 minutes between exposures. 2. Adjust the Collimator. a. Mount a dial indicator gauge and its holding fixture to the special mounting bracket of the collimator. b. Zero out the gauge. c. Loosen the four collimator mounting bolts, located in the four slotted holes on the collimator.
d. Adjust the 3/4 inch bolt, located at the top of the collimator, to move the collimator up or down by the specified distance. Turn the bolt clockwise to move the collimator down. Turn the bolt counterclockwise to move the collimator up.
e. Tighten the collimator bolts, and torque the four lock bolts to 10 +/1.0 ft.lbs. (120 +/12 in.lbs.). 3. Repeat the CBF scans, and collimator adjustment, until CBF falls within the 373.75 +/ 0.2 channel specification.
921
983
SAG 1. Use the same scan files you used in CBF to run sag_calc. 2. Type/enter sag_calc (displays a Help message showing proper syntax & format). 3. Type the boldface character string, and substitute your own Exam/series/image for the example shown: (CASE SENSITIVE). sag_calc airscan /data/[Large spot air scan#] i /data/[CBF & SAG scan #] EXAMPLE From previous chart
sag_calc airscan /data/iq.CT01.65101.2.15.hdr.23007.scan i /data/iq.CT01.65101.2.16.hdr.23008.scan
4. RECORD: CENT_PTP_DIFF (+/ 1.1 chan) Value=____________________ 5. Verify SAG meets the CBF peaktopeak channel difference of <1.1 channels. 6. Remove gauge and firmly tighten holding fixture in the gantry.
t
Chapter 9 Complete
922
APPENDIX 9A RADIAL ALIGNMENT

Use the Radial Alignment procedure to acquire default radial alignment Pin scans, and calculate the centroid and detector adjustments. Position the tube to the bottom of the Gantry for this procedure. Store: DD file results Results displayed for radial alignment: Success or failure of scan performed Detector adjustments (screw adjustments distances and directions) Message cannot find pin (if software cannot locate the pin)
WARNING WARNING
THE GANTRY CONTAINS ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL HAZARDS. MAKE SURE YOU TURN OFF BOTH THE LOOP CONTACTOR AND GANTRY HVDC (550) ENABLE SWITCH BEFORE YOU ACCESS THE GANTRY. ALSO, MAKE SURE YOU READ DIRECTION 46018302, CT HISPEED ADVANTAGE SAFETY GUIDELINES MANUAL, OR VIEW THE 46018308 CT HISPEED ADVANTAGE SAFETY VIDEO, PRIOR TO SERVICING THE GANTRY SUBSYSTEMS.
Radial Alignment (Cold Tube)

Note: Start with a cold tube unit. If you executed any low technique scans prior to beginning radial alignment, wait at least 5 minutes before you start this alignment procedure. If you executed image scanning, and want to recheck radial alignment, wait at least 90 minutes to allow the tube unit to cool, if the tube unit has greater than 25 Kilojoules exposure (kV x mA x Sec/1000) within the last 30 min. Failure to heed this caution may result in inaccurate radial alignment. You do not have to check Radial alignment when you replace the tube. 1. Roughly adjust the ISO Alignment before you check radial alignment. 2. Use the Isocenter procedure, on page 914, to move the tube within 0.005 of the correct position (the average ISO value of the large and small focal spot). Dont try to attain an ISO Alignment value of 373.75 +/ 0.02 channels, at this time. Proceed to the Radial Alignment as soon as ISO falls within 0.005 of the specified range.
Note:
923
PROCEDURE: 3. Display the Service Desktop 4. Select |Replacement Procedures|. 5. Select |RADIAL Alignment| |Start| 6. Select |Radial Align| ( DDC ) 7. Check Run Description Tube Align RAD. 8. Select |Position Tube 180| |OK| |Dismiss| (Tube Positioning) 9. Select |Accept Rx| RECORD Large Spot AIR SCAN# Exam______Series_______Image_______ 10. After the air scan is complete: |Dismiss| |Dismiss|(Radial Alignment) a. Turn OFF the axial enable switch. b. Turn OFF the Gantry HVDC (550) enable switch. 11. Open the front gantry cover; leave it open for the rest of the radial alignment. Tool Placement and Scan 1. Refer to Illustration 96. Install the rotational alignment tools on the detector. a. The pin must project into the XRay beam. b. Place the tool which contains the pin on the detector, but do not tighten its holding screw. c. Position the other tool over the pin, and insert the opposite end into the locating holes on the detector, and fingertighten the holding screws.
d. Make sure the tube remains in the 180 position. e. Turn ON the gantry HVDC (550) enable switch. (You can leave the axial enable switch in the OFF position for this test.)
ILLUSTRATION 96 RADIAL ALIGNMENT TOOL
924
2. Select |Replacement Procedures| 3. Select |Diagnostic Data Collection| |Start| 4. Select Protocol Name, Load protocol |ta_rad| 5. Check Run Description Tube Align RAD. 6. Check to ensure that the Position of the Tube is 180 degrees. 7. Select |Accept Rx| 8. Press (Start Scan) when it lights. RECORD RADIAL ALIGNMENT SCAN# Exam_____Series_____Image_____ Note: The Exam and Series numbers will be visible during the scan. The image number will flash for a moment at the end of the scan. If you have the Exam & Series #s the image # is easily determined prior to calculation(s). 9. Upon completion select |Dismiss| (back to Replacement Procedures) 10. Select |RADIAL Alignment| |Start| 11. Select |Radial Align| (get Scan) 12. Identify the Two scans just taken. If the Image #s are unknown, they will be the last Two images in the Exam & Series #s recorded previously. 13. Select the first of the Two scans. (This is the Large Spot Air scan.) 14. Select |Save Scan Data| of this scan file recorded in previous steps. Note: When the images are saved, each one is put into the directory /data/ and given a different identification number. When the number is displayed, record it for use in CBF & SAG calculations, select |Continue| and repeat for the other scan. Exam/Series/Image (EXAMPLE) Large Spot Air Scan = 65101/2/17 Saved File Name (EXAMPLE) /data/iq.CT01.65101.2.17.hdr.23009.scan
RADIAL Alignment Scan
= 65101/2/18
/data/iq.CT01.65101.2.18.hdr.23010.scan ^^^^^^
This important number is assigned randomly by computer

15. Select |Dismiss| 16. Select |Radial Scan ( Process )|
17. Type/enter rad_calc (to display a Help message showing proper syntax & format) 18. Type the boldface character string, and substitute your own Exam/series/image for the example shown: (CASE SENSITIVE) rad_calc airscan /data/[Large spot air scan#] i /data/[RADIAL scan#] EXAMPLE From previous chart
rad_calc airscan /data/iq.CT01.65101.2.17.hdr.23009.scan i /data/iq.CT01.65101.2.18.hdr.23010.scan
925
19. RECORD CENT_AVE___________________ Radial Adjustment Rotate the detector if the displayed value falls outside the 376.4 +/ 0.2 channel specification. 1. Refer to Illustration 97. Use the rotational adjustment hardware and the radial dial indicator mounting fixture to install a dial indicator on the side of the detector. 2. Set the dial indicator to 0.000.
ILLUSTRATION 97 ROTATIONAL HARDWARE
The system automatically displays the average centroid value and recommended amount to rotate detector. The preferred radial adjustment limits: 376.4 +/ 0.2 channels. If the system meets the radial adjustment limits, continue with the Isocenter adjustment, on page 914. If the value falls outside the 376.4 +/ 0.2 channel specification, proceed to the adjustment section.
20. Compare your value to the specification:
ROTATIONAL ADJUSTMENT LOCKING SCREW
DETECTOR MOUNTING NUT
ROTATIONAL ADJUSTMENT HEX
DIAL INDICATOR
ROTATIONAL ADJUSTMENT LOCKING SCREW
CT2830
3. Refer to Illustration 98, on the following page. a. Loosen all three sets of the large detector mounting nuts slightly, until they feel fingertight. b. Loosen the allen head rotational adjustment locking screws. 4. Refer to the Average Centroid value display, and use the adjustment cam to rotate the detector in the specified distance and direction. 5. After you complete the adjustment: a. Tighten the allen head rotational adjustment locking screws. b. Torque the inside detector mounting nuts to 25 ftlbs. c. Hold the inside nut to keep it from turning, while you torque the outside nuts to 25 ftlbs.
926
ILLUSTRATION 98 MOUNTING/ADJUSTMENT HARDWARE (DETAIL)
BOW ADJUSTMENT LOCK NUT ROTATIONAL ADJUSTMENT CAM ALLEN HEAD ROTATIONAL ADJUSTMENT SCREW DETECTOR MOUNTING NUTS ALLEN HEAD ROTATIONAL LOCKING SCREW
BOW ADJUSTMENT ALLEN HEAD ROTATIONAL ADJUSTMENT SCREW
DETECTOR MOUNTING NUTS ALLEN HEAD ROTATIONAL LOCKING SCREW
ROTATIONAL ADJUSTMENT CAM

ct2775
6. Repeat the radial alignment procedure, to verify the adjustment. 7. Record the actual Average Centroid value on FORM F4879X.
927
NOTES
928
CHAPTER 10 SYSTEM TESTS
CHAPTER 10 CONTENTS
101 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Calibration Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021 Prepare the QA Phantom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022 Calibration Process Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023 Check for the Presence of Cal Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024 Calibration Process A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025 Calibration Process B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 How to Scan with Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Adjust CT Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 How to Analyze Calibration data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 System Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1062 Table/Gantry Alignment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063 Tomographic Plane Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064 Exposure Time Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065 System Scanning Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Image Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071 Scan Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072 Data Recording: Means and Standard Deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073 Image Series Term Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074 Image Series for CT/i System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10741 Analyze Image Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075 QA Image Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 IMAGE DATA SHEET 48cm/L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 IMAGE DATA SHEET QA Phantom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010 IMAGE DATA SHEET QA Phantom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011 IMAGE DATA SHEET QA Phantom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012 IMAGE DATA SHEET QA Phantom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013 IMAGE DATA SHEET QA Phantom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014 Save System State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015 Tube Heat Soak and Seasoning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 10A Install Gantry Base Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 10B Thermal Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 10C Increment Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 10D Streak Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 10E Artifact Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 10F QCal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 10G Calibrate Crosstalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 10H Generate Alpha Vector CaL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 10I Image Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 103 103 103 103 105 107 108 1010 1011 1013 1013 1013 1015 1016 1017 1018 1018 1018 1019 1019 1019 1020 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1032 1033 1034 1035 1042 1044 1045 1046
101
101
Introduction This chapter contains descriptions of the Calibration Procedure, Initial Tests, System Functional tests and the Image Series which you run before you turn the system over to the customer. The Image Series sections instruct you to scan system phantoms, record the means and standard deviations, and evaluate the image quality of the resulting images.
ILLUSTRATION 101 SYSTEM TEST OVERVIEW
102
Start Process B Did you load Calibrations No QCal Crosstalk Alpha Vector
Yes All Air Cals
1 Air Cal
Align Phantoms Process A
Phantom Cal
N Number Check T/G Alignment Tomographic Plane Indication Exposure Time Accuracy System Functional Tests Image Series System State Save Heat Soak & Seasoning
End
103
102
Calibration Process New scanners are delivered with a System State MOD that holds the unique values for the hardware characterizations and imaging calibration. Restore these files from the MOD. If you no longer have these files or major system hardware has changed, you may need to create new calibration files.
1021
Prepare the QA Phantom When the Quality Assurance phantom is new, it requires someone to attach the correct label to it. 1. Fill the Quality Assurance (QA) phantom with distilled water. 2. Locate the multilanguage sticker packet in the QA phantom shipping box. 3. Attach the sticker with the customers language to the face of the phantom hanger bracket.
1022
Calibration Process Introduction If your system has a factory supplied state MOD, you should have loaded the system calibration files during the Restore System State, section 513, on page 510 of this manual. If you loaded the system cal files, proceed to section 1024. If the system does NOT have cal files, proceed to section 1025. To determine whether or not the system contains calibration files, proceed to section 1023.
1023
Check for the Presence of Cal Files 1. Select |SERVICE|
Service
2. Select |UTILITIES|
UTILITIES
104
3. Select |CAL ANALYSIS| EDITOR CALCULATOR CALENDAR SHELL CAL ANALYSIS SCAN ANALYSIS FILE 4. Select |START| to open the Cal List/Select window. DD ANALYSIS IMAGE ANALYSIS
. . . START. . . IF a Cal list appears (as shown below), somebody loaded the factory supplied Calibration files during the Chapter 5 procedures. After you complete this section, you may proceed to section 1024. or
ILLUSTRATION 102 CAL LIST/SELECT EXAMPLE cal_LS Select Group Group V KV Thick Phantom Spot Filter Date/Time
XTALK Y *** ***** ****** *** Wed Oct 4 20:44:29 1995 Afterglow Y *** ***** *** **** *** Thur Oct 5 14:18:57 1995 Q Cal Y 80 1 ***** Small ***** Wed Oct 4 20:29:05 1995 Cold Q Cal N 80 1 ***** Small *** Body Wed Nov 29 16:29:59 1995 Air Y 80 1 ***** Small Body Wed Nov 29 16:29:59 1995 Water BH Y 80 1 ******** Small Body Wed Nov 29 16:29:59 1995 Poly BH Y 80 1 ******** Small Body Wed Nov 29 16:29:59 1995 Air Cal Scal Y 80 1 ******** Small Body Wed Nov 29 16:29:59 1995 Q Cal Y 80 3 ***** Small ***** Wed Oct 4 20:29:05 1995 Air Y 80 3 ***** Small Body Wed Nov 29 16:29:59 1995 Cold Q Cal N 80 3 ***** Small *** Body Wed Nov 29 16:29:59 1995
IF the system does NOT display a list of calibrations, complete this section, then proceed to directly to section 1025.
Set Sort Mode Module Valid Save Module Save Vector Show Vector Save Full DB Restore Full DB
This is a generic representation of a cal list. Your system may appear sightly difAir Y 80 3 ***** Small Body Wed Nov 29 16:29:59 1995 ferent.
Air Y 80 3 ***** Small 5 Mon Nov 29 16:29:59 1995 Water BH Y 80 3 ******** Small 5 Mon Nov 29 16:29:59 1995 Poly BH Y 80 3 ******** Small 5 Mon Nov 29 16:29:59 1995 Medium Mis Y 80 3 ******** Small Body Thur Nov 27 16:29:59 1995 A Cal Scal Y 80 3 ******** Small Body Mon Nov 27 16:29:59 1995 A Cal Scal Y 80 3 ******** Small Body Mon Nov 29 10:28:53 1995 Q Cal Y 80 3 ***** Small ***** Wed Oct 4 20:29:05 1995 Cold Q Cal N 80 5 ***** Small *** Body Wed Nov 29 16:29:59 1995 Air Y 80 5 ***** Small Body Wed Nov 29 16:29:59 1995
105
5. Select |Dismiss| 6. Select |Shutdown| 7. Display the Toolchest menu, and select |System Down|. Note: Do NOT select |Log Out| at this time. Log out may inadvertently delete software in the /usr/g directory. 8. After the system completes the shutdown, restart the system. 1024 Calibration Process A
1. Select
Daily Prep
to warm up the tube and run automa cal.
2. Select Scanner Utilities
3. Select
Detailed Calibration from the Scanner Utilities Menu.
4. Refer to Illustration 103. Select the following screen parameters: a. Calibration Type: AIR b. KV: Select all the kV settings for site use. c. Note:
ILLUSTRATION 103 DETAILED CALIBRATION SCREEN
Aperture: 1mm, 3mm, 5mm, 7mm and 10mm.
Do NOT select aperture scaled
106
Detailed Calibration
Calibration Type
Air
Small SFOV
Large SFOV
Adjust CT Number...
KV
80KV
100KV
120KV
140KV
Aperture
Scaled
1mm
3mm
5mm
7mm
10mm
107
5. Run the selected Air Calibrations. 6. When the calibration process completes, continue to the Phantom Self Calibration procedure, on page 1011. 1025 Calibration Process B Follow this calibration process when the system does not have the factory set of calibration files from the System State MOD. 1. QCals, use Appendix 10F for reference, if required. 2. Crosstalk calibration, use Appendix 10G for reference, if required. 3. Alpha Vector calibration, use Appendix 10H for reference, if required. 4. Do Hot ISO calibration, if available. 5. Use the user select option, (NOT SmartCal), to acquire 1 Air Cal at 120kV/1mm/large focal spot. 6. Use a bubble level and the Zaxis knob on the phantom holder to level the phantom. 7. Refer to Illustration 104. Acquire Air and Phantom Calibrations, with the following parameters: a. Calibration Type: AIR, Small FOV, Large FOV b. KV: Select all the kV settings for site use. c.
ILLUSTRATION 104 DETAILED CALIBRATION SCREEN
Aperture: Scaled (equivalent to the RP SmartCal)
Detailed Calibration
Calibration Type
Air
Small SFOV
Large SFOV
Adjust CT Number...
KV
80KV
100KV
120KV
140KV
Aperture
Scaled
1mm
3mm
5mm
7mm
10mm
8. When the calibration process completes, continue to the Phantom Self Calibration procedure, on page 1011.
108
103
How to Scan with Protocols Locate the Manufacturing and Installation protocols under Infant area 20. Use these to help you prescribe System Tests. If you know the Protocol Number, you may enter it on the Exam Rx Screen in the Protocol field. This describes how to select it graphically.
1. Select
New Patient
2. Enter
Patient ID
3. Click left on the Infant anatomical figure icon.
4. Click left on the area below the infants feet. (inside circle)
5. Select a protocol from the list, to display the corresponding view edit screen. Optional Method: Enter the Protocol Number into the Protocol Number Field on the Exam Rx Screen.
109
ILLUSTRATION 105 PROTOCOL LIST (EXAMPLE)
Note:
20.1 20.2 20.3 20.4 20.5 20.6 20.7 20.8 20.9 20.10 20.11 20.12 20.13 20.14
Because this Protocol list is shared by manufacturing and service, it is used for many product offerings. Please read the instructions carefully for any scanning test. Verify the stated technique has been selected before scanning and filling out the data sheet. The protocol may prescribe a technique that is not correct for your system. You may waste time troubleshooting an image problem that only exists because an inappropriate technique was used.
1010
104
Adjust CT Number Run the small and large phantom self calibrations before you acquire the Image Series, or any time you doubt the N# values. The self calibration procedure modifies 48cm poly phantom and 20cm water phantom CT numbers until water has a CT number equal to zero. After a successful self calibration, any water phantom scanned against a small or large CAL has a CT number near zero. 1. Select |EXAM RX|
Exam Rx
2. Place the QA phantom on the phantom holder. Align the water section with the laser lights.
3. Select |SCANNER UTILITIES|
Scanner Utilities 4. Select
Center Phantom
from the Scanner Utilities Menu.
Center the Phantom.
5. Select the Service Protocol (Protocol 20.9) or
N Numbers
6. Manually select the scan parameters in Table 101 and 102.

TABLE 101 SMALL CAL N #
Phantom 20 20 20 20
Scan FOV S S S S
kV 140 120 100 80
mA 140 200 240 170
Thickness 10 10 10 10
Scan Time 4 4 4 4
# of Scans 2 2 2 2
Display FOV 25cm 25cm 25cm 25cm
1011
TABLE 102 LARGE CAL N #
Phantom 20 20
Scan FOV L L
kV 140 120
mA 140 200
Thickness 10 10
Scan Time 4 4
# of Scans 2 2
Display FOV 25 cm 25 cm
7. Complete the scans. 8. Proceed to section 105, and use the worksheets in Table 103 and Table 104 to record the values, and adjust the N numbers. 105 How to Analyze Calibration data 1. Select |SERVICE|
Service
2. Select |UTILITIES|
UTILITIES
3. Select |IMAGE ANALYSIS|
TUBE DISPLAY CAL ANALYSIS SCAN ANALYSIS DD FILE ANALYSIS IMAGE ANALYSIS INSTALL OPTIONS
4. Select |START|
. . . START. . .
1012
5. When the Browser opens, select an Exam/Series to analyze. 6. Select |Manual ROI| 7. A viewer opens with a 14cm X 14cm box located in the middle of the image. 8. Click the right mouse button once to measure and display the ROI. To examine subsequent images: Click the right mouse button 2X to close the image and result window, and select a new image from the browser.
9. Use the Table 103 worksheet record the phantom values for each technique.
TABLE 103 ADJUST CT NUMBER WORKSHEET
N# adjustment instructions begin with Step 10.
Small CAL Exam# Slice 1 Slice 2 2 Slice Average N# Large CAL Exam# Slice 1 Slice 2 2 Slice Average N#
80kV
100kV
120kV
140kV
80kV n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
100kV n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
120kV
140kV
Use a 14 X 14 cm box; CTn = CTcAvXc, where: CTn = New CT number CTc = Current CT number AvXc = 2 slice avg. mean of the 14cm X 14cm box.
Specification for the 2 Slice Average= 0.0 +1.5 10. Select |Set/Adjust N#s|
1013
11. When the N# adjustment tool opens, type/enter the values you recorded in Table 103, into the table on the screen. a. Start a new exam to accept the values you entered into the table. b. Repeat the process until the N numbers meet the specification. c.
TABLE 104 N NUMBER SUMMARY
Fill in the following N Number Summary Table.
Scan FOV Small Large
80kV n/a
100kV n/a
120kV
140kV
Specification for the 2 Slice Average= 0.0 +/ 1.5
t
106 1061 System Tests Introduction
System Tests, described in the following sections, exercise all aspects of the system. You want to use them to assure system integrity, before turnover to the Customer. Although the Means, Standard Deviation and Resolution specifications do not apply during system functional tests, treat any artifact or image anomaly as a failure. If you encounter a failure during the system tests: Record any evidence of artifacts, such as rings, streaks, shading, cupping, noise, or center artifacts. Correct artifacts, System Test or Image Series failures when they occur. Any delay in repairs could increase the number of retests. Consult the General System Service Manual (2152918100) Replacement Test and Verification Matrix any time you adjust, or replace a component to repair a failure. Locate the corresponding subsystem and component, if applicable. Follow the corresponding list of Minimum Retest Procedures.
1062
Table/Gantry Alignment Procedure 1. Drive the table to its highest elevation. 2. Check the relationship between the cradle and the cradle drive end: a. Set the gap between the angled rollers, to center the cradle over the drive end. b. Make sure the cradle does NOT touch either angled roller. 3. To adjust the cradle, loosen the six cradle mounting bolts. 4. Turn on the alignment lights. 5. Advance the end of the cradle to the internal light. The cradle end should be parallel to the light, (assuming proper alignment light function). If necessary, adjust the table to bring the cradle end into parallel alignment with the light.
1014
6. Align the front edge of the cradle with the laser light. 7. Select the Service Protocol (Protocol 20.4) or 8. Manually select the scan parameters in Table 105.
TABLE 105 PERPENDICULAR ALIGNMENT SCAN PARAMETERS
Perpendicular Alignment
Scan Type Axial Axial
Direction Head First Head First
kV 120 120
mA 40 40
SFOV Large Large
Thickness 5 mm 5 mm
Scan Time 2sec 2sec
Start Loc. S0 I1000
Algorithm Bone Bone
9. Use over/under multiimage display to view both images at the same time. 10. Orient the vertical cursor to 90 degrees, and use it to verify that the left and right edges of the cradle fall on a straight line. If the edges do NOT line up: a. Loosen the table anchors at locations #5, #6 and #7. b. Move the table half the distance. c. Return to step 7. Repeat the procedure until the table edges line up.
d. Tighten the anchors, and torque to 75 +/ 6 Nm (55 +/ 5 ftlbs). e. Reinstall all the table parts you removed to access the anchors, including covers, ground straps and the center support bar. 11. Install the Table and Gantry covers. Appendix 10A , on page 1031 contains the Gantry Base Cover installation procedure.
1015
1063
Tomographic Plane Indication 1. Place the QA phantom on the phantom holder. 2. Turn ON the internal alignment lights, and drive the phantom into the gantry opening, until the black line on the phantom lines up with the internal laser lights. 3. Verify that BOTH internal axial lasers line up along the black line on the QA phantom. If not, check table/gantry, cradle, and/or laser alignment. 4. Center the phantom in the scan plane with the Calibration program. 5. Select the Service Protocol (Protocol 20.5) or 6. Manually select the scan parameters in Table 106.
Tomo Plane Indication
TABLE 106 TOMOGRAPHIC PLANE INDICATION SCAN PARAMETERS
Scan Type Axial
kV 120
mA 100
SFOV Small
Thickness 1mm
Scan Time 2.0sec
Start Loc. I5.0
End Loc. S5.0
Algorithm Bone detail
7. Display the image series, and locate the scan plane indicator, the longest bar in the bar pattern on the right side of the phantom. The right side of the phantom corresponds to the side of the image labeled L on the display screen.
8. On the HHS Data Sheet (FORM F4879X Chapter 11), record the scan location (shown on the image annotation) of the image with the darkest scan plane indicator (darkest long bar). 9. If your system meets all the installation and alignment specifications, the image at scan location zero (S0.0) should contain the scan plane indicator. If scan location S1.0 or scan location I1.0 has the darkest bar, the system still meets the specification. The scan plane deviation should equal S0.0 +/ 1.0mm. If necessary, adjust the internal alignment light position to meet the S0.0 +/ 1.0mm requirement.
10. Repeat the Tomographic Plane Indication test with the external alignment lights. a. Use the external alignment light, and press the external landmark. b. Verify the external light lines up along the black line on BOTH the left and right sides of the QA phantom. c. The scan plane indication must fall within the S0.0 +1.0mm specification.
11. Check the box on Form 4879X.
1016
1064
Exposure Time Accuracy 1. Turn on Monitor Enable to read the scan times. a. Select |End Exam| to halt any exam in progress. b. Display the Service Desktop Manager. c. Select |System Integration|.
d. Select |Diagnostic Data Collection|. e. Select the DDC protocol (bleedersetup). f. Select |Monitor Enable| to display the scan times in the message log. Do NOT Dismiss, or close, the DDC window, because it turns OFF the monitor enable function.
2. Toggle to the Exam Rx desktop. 3. Select the Service Protocol (Protocol 20.6) or 4. Manually select the scan parameters in Table 107.
TABLE 107 EXPOSURE TIME ACCURACY SCAN PARAMETERS
Exposure Time Accuracy
Scan Type Scout Scout Scout Axial Axial Axial Helical
kV 120 120 120 120 120 120 120
mA 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
SFOV Large Large Large Large
Thickness 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm
Scan Time 0.6sec 1.0sec 4.0sec
Start Loc. I10 I75 I300 S0 S0 S0 I145
End Loc. S10 S75 S300
Pitch
S145
1:1
5. Complete the scans, and record the scan times displayed in the message log, on Form F4879X (Chapter 11). 6. When complete, toggle to the Service Desktop, and |Dismiss| the DDC window to turn OFF the Monitor Enable function. Failure to turn OFF Monitor Enable fills the message log with kV, mA and scan times.
1017
1065
System Scanning Test Use the System Scanning Test to verify hardware functionality. Review images for visible artifacts, and review the message log for unacceptable errors. 1. Place the QA phantom on the cradle. Note: Drive the table to an elevation of 100. Align the black line on the phantom with the internal laser lights.
Never scan above 50 mA without first placing a phantom in the field of view. Levels in excess of 50 mA can cause temporary radiation damage to the detector that lasts several hours. If you acquire image series cals with a radiation damaged detector, the cals may cause artifacts in subsequent image series scans.
System Scan/Cust Qual Reli
3. Manually select the scan parameters in Table 108.

TABLE 108 SYSTEM SCANNING TEST SCAN PARAMETERS
Scan Type Scout Scout Cine Axial Axial Helical Full Helical Plus*
kV 120 120 120 120 120 120 120
mA 40 40 50 50 50 50 50
SFOV Large Large Large Large Large
Thickness 10mm 10mm 10mm 5mm 5mm
Scan Time 30sec 1.0sec 1.0sec 30sec 30sec
Start Loc. S200 S200 S0 S0 S0 S70 S70
End Loc. I800 I800 S0 S0 S0 I75 I75
Tilt/Pitch 0 90 1.0 I30 S30 1:1 1:1
4. Complete the scans.
1018
107 1071
Image Series Scan Protocol The person who acquires the image series has the responsibility to review the images, and verify they meet the specifications listed on data sheets. Responsibilities also include making the means and standard deviation measurements, and keeping a record of failures that occur during the image series. Recommended Scan Parameters Unless otherwise stated, use the following scan parameters during the Image Series acquisition: Failure Criteria Consider any image series scan that does not meet specifications as failing. For means and standard deviations, 90% of the slices must pass. Any failure on a particular technique requires at least 10 additional slices to evaluate effectively. Phantom must be level Systems with metalfree cradles have a phantom holder with a perpendicular adjustment (Zaxis) knob on it. Each time you change phantoms, make sure you use a bubble level, and the Zaxis knob on the phantom holder, to level the phantom. Image Troubleshooting If you loaded the factory supplied phantom calibrations on your system, and you followed the System Alignment and Air Calibration procedures in this manual, the image series should pass. If you encounter image failures with the factory supplied cal files, consult the Image troubleshooting flowchart in Appendix 10I , on page 1047. Scan FOV equal to display FOV (Field of View) 512x512 matrix size Peristaltic ON
1072
Data Recording: Means and Standard Deviation Use the IMAGE DATA SHEETS in sections 108 through 1013 on pages 1023 through 1028 to record the results of the Image Series testing. Any failure on a particular technique requires at least a 10 additional slices to evaluate effectively. For means and standard deviations, 90% of the slices must pass. Record means to 2 decimal places, and round to the nearest onetenth, (one decimal place) when you compare the resulting values to the spec. Record standard deviations to 2 decimal places, then round off to one decimal place, to compare it to the spec. Average standard deviations: Use two decimal places to average the values, then round off to one place.
Before you record the means and standard deviations, check the image data sheets to determine whether to average the means and standard deviations, or record them slice by slice. Make sure you record all the required Image data on the HHS data sheets (Form F4879X Chapter 11).
1019
1073
Image Series Term Definitions Xc AvXc Xo AvXo AvSDc AvSDo Mean CT number for the specified center coordinates of the phantom image. Average Mean CT number for the center of the phantom image: Average the mean CT value for all specified center coordinates of all slices in an exam. Mean CT number for the outside of the phantom image: Average the mean CT value for all specified outside coordinates of one slice. Average outside mean CT number for the number of slices in an exam. Average image noise about the center image coordinate (measured as the standard deviation) of all slices in an exam. Average image noise (standard deviation) for the outside of a phantom: Average of all outside coordinates of all the slices in an exam.
1074
Image Series for CT/i System 1. Place the 48cm phantom on the phantom holder. Align phantom with the internal laser lights. Center the phantom with the Calibration program.
2. Select the Second Series of the Service Protocol, (Protocol 20.10) or 3. Manually select the scan parameters in Table 109.
TABLE 109 CT/I IMAGE SERIES SCAN PARAMETERS
Image Series 48cm
Scan Type Axial
Phantom 48cm
kV 120
mA 400
SFOV Large
Thickness 10 mm
Scan Time 4.0 sec
Start Loc. S0
# of scans 4
4. Record the data on the IMAGE DATA SHEET, page 1023, and verify the images meet specifications. 5. Proceed to section 10741, to analyze the image series. 10741 Analyze Image Series 1. Display the Service Desktop |Utilities| menu. 2. Select |Image Analysis|. 3. When the Browser opens, select the 48cm Exam. 4. Select |Series Means| to open a viewer and results window. 5. The results window reports the series means data. Record the results data on the IMAGE DATA SHEET, page 1023, and verify the values meet all specifications.
1020
1075
QA Image Series 1. Place the QA phantom, 46241852G1, on the phantom holder. Align the black line with the laser lights. Center with the Calibration program.
Image Series QA

TABLE 1010 IMAGE SERIES QA SCAN PARAMETERS
Scan Type Axial Axial Axial Axial Axial
Phantom Type QA#1 QA#1 QA#1 QA#2 QA#3
kV 120 120 120 120 120
mA 170 170 340 170 170
SFOV Small Small Small Small Small
Thickness 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm
Scan Time 2.0 sec 2.0 sec 1.0 sec 2.0 sec 2.0 sec
# of scans 4 4 4 4 4
Comments S0.0 Bone Retro w/ DFOV = 15cm S0.0 S35.0 Peristaltic OFF S50.0
4. Retrospectively reconstruct the first QA#1 scan with the Bone algorithm, and 15cm Display FOV, for later analysis. Use the parameters in Table 1010 to reconstruct the image.
5. Record the data on the IMAGE DATA SHEETS, pages 1023 through 1027, and verify the images meet specifications. 6. Proceed to section 10751, to analyze the QA image series. 10751 Analyze QA Image Series Return to the Image Analysis tool. 1. Select the QA Exam from the Image Browser. 2. Select |QA#1| to open a viewer and results window.
1021
3. Refer to Illustration 106, to adjust the image window: a. Press and hold the middle mouse button. b. Move the mouse in the horizontal and vertical directions to adjust the Window Width and Window Level, until the line pair patterns become visible.
ILLUSTRATION 106 ADJUST WINDOW WIDTH/LEVEL WITH MOUSE
Hold Down
Move for Window Width Adjust Move for Window Level Adjust
4. Refer to Illustration 107. To position the ROI box, and analyze: a. Move: Position the mouse cursor over the box. Press and hold the left mouse button, and move the mouse to reposition the box. b. Accept: Click the right mouse button once, to accept the current position. c. Accept: Toggle the right mouse button to accept the remaining ROIs.
5. The system calculates and displays the MTF and Contrast Scale in the Image Analysis Results window.
ILLUSTRATION 107 REPOSITION ROI WITH MOUSE
Click once to accept Move 2X Click to exit.

3 2 1 1022
You cannot reposition Box 1. It automatically appears over the F line pairs.
6. Double click the right mouse button to exit. 7. The software automatically evaluates the QA#2 & 3. Select the Exam/Series and the QA#2 or QA#3 Softkeys to execute.
8. Record the data on the IMAGE DATA SHEETS, pages 1024 through 1028 and verify the scans meet all specifications.
108
IMAGE DATA SHEET 48cm/L Scan parameters: 48cm/L/10mm/120KV/400mA/4sec
Exam # # of Slice
AvXc
AvXo
AvXo AvXc
AvSDo
Comments
Scan Tech Aprov
SPECS
+/8.5
< 14.0
Box Size: 45 x 45 pixels Center Coordinates: 256, 256 Outside Coordinates: 256, 60 452, 256 256, 452 60, 256 Image Acceptance/Date: _______________ Certified Image Reviewer:_______________
Artifact Limits: Rings: 48/L; 30 to 36 counts 42/L; 15 to 18 counts 1mm; NA 8.0 counts 0 to 23.5cm 48/L; 3.0 SIGMA 42/L; 2.2 SIGMA 1mm; N/A N/A
Band: Band Radius: Clump:
Center Spot:
Center Artifact: N/A Smudge: 48/L; 6.8 counts 1mm; 14.0 counts 42/L; 6.1 counts 1mm; 12 counts 4.0 counts
Streaks:
1023
109
IMAGE DATA SHEET QA Phantom QA#1 scan parameters: S/10mm/120KV/170mA/2 sec Scan at 0mm Use this scan data for following Bone Retro. Record data on Form F4879X.
Exam # # of Slice
MTF
MTF 4 slice average
Contrast Scale
Comments/Artifacts
Scan Tech Aprov
SPECS 0.68 to 1.0 110.0 to 130.0
Box Size: 17 x 17 pixels Image Acceptance/Date: _______________ Certified Image Reviewer:_______________
For Reference Only: Use this manual method to calculate MTF and Contrast Scale only when you cannot access Tool QA#1.
ROI B
ROI C
F E D C B A
CT2723
Contrast Scale = mean of Bmean of C. ROI A SDA = SD of ROI Box over F slits. SDave = (SDB + SDC ) /2
Modulation =
SD A
SD ave
MTF = 2.2 (Modulation/Contrast Scale)
1024
1010
IMAGE DATA SHEET QA Phantom QA#1 scan parameters: S/10mm/120KV/170mA/2 sec/ Bone Retro/DISPLAY FOV=15cm Scan at 0mm
Exam # # of Slice
Line Patterns Visible
Comments/Artifacts
Scan Tech Aprov
SPECS
B,C,D,E,F
Image Acceptance/Date: _______________ Certified Image Reviewer:_______________
QA#1 scan parameters: S/10mm/120KV/340mA/1 sec Scan at 0mm Record results on Form F4879X. Exam # # of Slice MTF 4 slice average Scan Tech Aprov
MTF
Contrast Scale
Comments/Artifacts
SPECS 0.65 to 1.00 110.0 to 130.0
Box Size: 17 x 17 pixels Image Acceptance/Date: _______________ Certified Image Reviewer:_______________
1025
1011
IMAGE DATA SHEET QA Phantom QA#2 scan parameters: S/10mm/120KV/170mA/2 sec/Peristaltic OFF Scan at 35mm (S35.0)
Exam# and Slice#
Visible Holes (View at window of 20)
Contrast Factor
Comments/Artifacts
Scan Tech Aprov
SPECS
See Below
2.0 to 12.0
Contrast Factor 2.00 to 3.99 4.00 to 7.99 8.00 to 12.00
Visible Number of Holes: Lower Limit* 2 3 4
Visible Number of Holes: Upper Limit* 5 5 5
Smallest Visible Hole: Size 7.5 mm 5.0 mm 3.0 mm
*Required number of visible holes depends on the contrast factor. 2 out of the 4 scans taken must meet this specification. Image Acceptance/Date: _______________ Certified Image Reviewer:_______________
For Reference Only: Use this manual method to calculate the Contrast Factor only when you cannot access Tool QA#2. ROI D ROI E 10mm 7.5mm 5.0mm 3.0mm 1.5mm
ROI D 49 X 9 pixels x=256, y=200 ROI E 49 X 9 pixels x= 256, y=235 Contrast Factor = Mean E Mean D
1026
1012
IMAGE DATA SHEET QA Phantom QA#3 scan parameters: S/10mm/120KV/170mA/2 sec Scan at 50mm Record data on Form F4879X.
Exam # # of Slice
Mean
Std Dev
Average Std Dev (average of 4 slices)
Comments/Artifacts
Scan Tech Aprov
SPECS 0.0 + 1.5 See Below*
Box Size: 51 x 51 pixels at Coordinate 256, 256 *If tube has < 5000 scans, spec = 3.00 to 3.60. If tube has > 5000 scans, spec = 3.00 to 3.80.
1027
1013
IMAGE DATA SHEET QA Phantom QA#3/S/10mm/120KV/170mA/2 sec Do not scan. Evaluate images from previous step.
Exam # # of Slice
AvXc
AvXo
AvXo AvXc
Comments/Artifacts
Scan Tech Aprov
SPECS
Box Size: 31 x 31 pixels Center Coordinates: 256, 256 Outside Coordinates: 256, 95 417, 257 256,417 95, 256
Artifact Limits: Rings: Band: Band Radius: Clump: Center Spot: 4.0/4.8 cts 2.8 cts 08.5 cm N/A N/A
Center Artifact: 3.5 Std. Dev. Smudge: Streaks: 2.2 counts 1 mm; 4.0 counts 4.0 cts
1028
1014
Save System State The procedure that follows tells how to create, update or restore the System State on MOD. The MOD used must have a UNIX file system. Any MOD formatted for images cannot be used. Note: DO NOT SAVE State after you reload software UNTIL you restore the REAL State; new software puts system defaults on the disk. If you save state before you restore, you will be saving defaults. Prevent this MOD from being labeled as an IMAGE ARCHIVE MOD because this step will format the MOD differently without mentioning there are system files on it. 1. Load a new or the system MOD into the drive on the front of the console. An MOD that has been labeled for IMAGE ARCHIVE cannot be used because it has a different format than a system MOD. Use the Service Desktop Manager Commands that follow, to create the System State MOD. 2. Display the Service Desktop Manager: 3. Select |PM| 4. Select |System State| to open the System State Save/Restore menu. 5. Select |All| or the items that are appropriate to archive. Protocols Characterization Calibration Configuration Auto Voice Display Preferences Scan, DDC, Archive Table, Gantry, InSite Tube, HV, Gantry, DAS, Detector, SW Network, Filming, Timezones, InSite
Note:
6. Select |Save| 7. When the save operation completes, the LED on the drive will stop flashing and it will be safe to select |File| and |Quit| from the pull down menu. 8. Remove the MOD from the drive. Mark it so that no one will use it for IMAGE ARCHIVE. 9. To restore System State from this MOD, follow the same procedure as above in steps 1. through 8., but at step 6., instead of selecting |Save|, select |Restore|.
1029
1015
Tube Heat Soak and Seasoning 1. If you ran the Tube Heat Soak and Seasoning during Generator Calibration, skip this section. 2. Refer to Chapter 8 , Appendix 8B for details of how to perform Tube Heat Soak and Seasoning.
t
Chapter 10 Complete
1030
APPENDIX 10A INSTALL GANTRY BASE COVERS
Gantry Base Cover Installation Note: This procedure references the Base Cover Installation drawing, 46297782, shown on the next page. (Illustration 108). A copy of this drawing also ships with the system. The rear raceway assembly, p/n 46297628G1, item 12 on the installation drawing, consists of raceway pan 46297624P1, cover plate 46297627P1. and raceway cover 46297623P1. Install to gantry using 4 screws, p/n 46170015P2 and 4 washers, p/n 12277, items 13 and 14 on the installation drawing. If the site uses floor troughs, discard cover plate, 46297627P1. Some installations do not require the rear raceway. Note: Leave all cover screws loose until all covers and screws are in place. 1. Install the four extensions, p/n 506A657P71, item 11, as shown on the installation drawing, illustration 108. 2. Install the base cover 46297214P1, item 3, as shown on the installation drawing, with four screws 46208560P129, item 7 on illustration 108. Note: It is physically possible to install this cover backwards. The side of the cover with the slotted holes faces the back of the gantry. 3. Install the base cover 46297212P1, item 1 on the installation drawing, with two screws, 46208560P129, item 7 on the installation drawing. 4. Install the base cover 46297212P2, item 8 on the installation drawing, with two screws, 46208560P129, item 7 on the installation drawing. 5. Install the base cover 46297213P1, item 2 on the installation drawing, with thirteen screws, 46208560P129, item 7 on the installation drawing. 6. Install the base cover 46297215P1 , item 4 on the installation drawing, with thirteen screws, 46208560P129, item 7 on the installation drawing. 7. Install the top cover of the rear raceway, item 12 of the installation drawing, with six screws, 46208560P129, item 7 on the installation drawing. 8. Install the base cover 46297216P1, item 5 on the installation drawing, with two screws, 46208560P129, item 7 on the installation drawing. 9. Install the base cover 46297268P2, item 10 on the installation drawing, with two screws, 46208560P129, item 7 on the installation drawing. 10. Install the base cover 46297268P1 item 9 on the installation drawing, with two screws, 46208560P129, item 7 on the installation drawing. 11. Install the base cover 46297223P1 item 6 on the installation drawing, with two screws, 46208560P129, item 7 on the installation drawing. 12. This completes the gantry base cover installation.
1031
ILLUSTRATION 108 BASE COVER INSTALLATION DRAWING
(2)7 (3)7 9 2 (3)7 (6)7
(2)7
10
4 (6)7 8 (2)7
(4)7 (6)7 (4)7 3
6 (2)7 (2)7 12 (2)7 1 (2)11 13(4) 14(4) 5 (2)11
1032
APPENDIX 10B THERMAL TEST

Start the thermal test with a cold XRay tube. Allow the tube to cool at least 60 minutes before starting this test. 1. Place the QA phantom on the phantom holder. Align the water section of the phantom with the internal laser lights. Use the Calibration program to center the phantom.
Service Generic Scan

TABLE 1011 THERMAL TEST SCAN PARAMETERS
Scan Type Axial Axial Axial
Phantom QA QA QA
kV 120 120 120
mA 200 200 200
SFOV Small Small Small
Thickness 1 mm 10 mm 1 mm
Scan Time 4.0 sec 4.0 sec 4.0 sec
Start Loc. S0 S0 S0
# of scans 1 20 1
4. Record the Std Dev data on the following data sheet, and verify the images meet specifications. Thermal Test Data Sheet Exam #______________________ 1 mm 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm 1 mm ______________ _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ ______________
1mm slice difference_________________ 10mm slice difference________________
< 4.0 cts YES______________ Technician_________________ Date_______________________
1033
APPENDIX 10C INCREMENT CRADLE
Cradle Incrementation Use this test to verify the following: Cradle position agrees with the commands sent from the OC Gantry display within SPEC over a 300 mm range.
1. Cover the cradle with a blanket, or protective material. 2. Load the cradle with a least 34kg (75 lbs) of weight. 3. Extend a metric tape measure at least 300mm, and tape it on the cradle top, next to one of the edges. 4. Turn on the patient alignment lights. 5. Drive the cradle into the gantry, and align a convenient point on the tape measure, such as 50mm, with the internal axial lights. 6. Use the scan RX menu to acquire a scan at location I100 mm. Do not worry about technique and image quality during the cradle incrementation test.
7. Turn on the patient alignment lights. 8. Record the distance of cradle movement from your starting point. 9. Repeat this procedure at the following scan locations: I200 mm I300 mm 0 mm
10. Verify your recorded measurements fall within the minimum and maximum specifications listed in Table 1012.
TABLE 1012 CRADLE INCREMENTATION SPECS
Scan Location I100 I200 I300 S0
Minimum Distance 99.75 mm 199.75 mm 299.75 mm 0.25 mm
Recorded Distance
Maximum Distance 100.25 mm 200.20 mm 300.25 mm 0.25 mm
Tech_________________________
Date __________
1034
APPENDIX 10D STREAK TEST

1. Place the 48cm phantom on the phantom holder. Align the phantom to the internal laser lights. Use the Calibration program to center the phantom.
Streak Test

TABLE 1013 STREAK TEST SCAN PARAMETERS
Scan Type Axial
kV 120
mA 200
SFOV Large
Thickness 5 mm
Scan Time 1.0 sec
# of scans 50
4. Evaluate all images for streaks or rings. 5. Fix all streak or ring failures. All 50 slices ring and streak free ? YES ______
1035
APPENDIX 10E ARTIFACT DEFINITIONS
Center Smudge Definition: A dark or light area, with no defined edges, located near the center of the reconstruction. Method of Measurement for all images, including 12.5 cm (5 inch): 48cm/L and 42cm/L images: position a 13x13 pixel ellipse over the smudge, and measure the mean of the smudge. Other techniques: position a minimum 13x13 pixel ellipse (169 pixels), over the smudge, and measure the mean of the smudge, If necessary increase the size of the ellipse to approximate the size of the smudge. 48cm/L and 42cm/L techniques: position a 41x41 pixel ellipse about the center of the reconstruction circle, and use it to measure the reference, background mean. Other techniques: Use an ellipse at least 4 times larger than the ellipse used to measure the mean of the smudge, to measure the reference, background mean.
Reference Mean
Failure: The technique fails when the difference between the mean of the smudge and the reference exceeds the corresponding limit value for that technique. Application: 10mm 48/L 42/L 35/L 20/S 12.5/S 7mm 35/M 5mm 35/M 12.5/S 3mm 35/M 1mm 48/L 42/L 20/S
If either the 48/L or 42/L pass the test for a given kV and aperture, consider both the 48/L and 42/L having passed that technique. Failure Rate: 80% of all scans at a given technique must meet the spec.
1036
Rings Definition: A dark or light circle, or partially closed circle, approximately 1 to 3 pixels in width. Method of Measurement: Ring mean value: Deposit two ellipses bordering the ring or partial ring. Take care not to include pixels outside the ring within the ellipses. (You may magnify an image up to 3X to help determine if a ring or partial ring exists.) Most rings consist of a dark and light ring pair; measure one color ring at a time.
48cm/L and 42cm/L techniques: the ring must equal 0.5cm radius (1.0cm diameter), or greater. Measure rings smaller than 0.5cm radius for clump. Rings must have an arc of 30 degrees or greater to be considered a ring. Bone detail images must have a ring with at least a180 degrees arc to fail.
Background mean value: Position a 2cm x 2cm (or larger) box over an unmagnified image, so it includes the ring or partial ring, and measure the mean. Failure: The technique fails when the difference between the ring mean and the background mean exceeds the corresponding limit value for that technique. The Image Analysis Program spec limit equals 1.2 times the spec limit of the manual measurement. Application: 10mm 48/L 42/L 35/L 20/S 12.5/S 7mm 35/M 5mm 35/M 12.5/S 3mm 35/M 1mm 20/S
If either the 48/L or 42/L pass the test for a given kV and aperture, consider both the 48/L and 42/L as having passed that technique. Failure Rate: 48/L and 42/L techniques: 80% of all slices must meet the spec at a given technique All other technique: No more than one ring every 250 slices
1037
Streaks Definition: Straight dark or light lines, of any length, across an image, usually 1 to 3 pixels in width. Method of Measurement: Mean of the Streak: Use the trace to outline the streak in a magnified or unmagnified image, then measure distance or deposit cursors to measure. Most streaks consist of a dark and light streak pair, measure only one color streak at a time. Measure the mean of the streak.
Background mean: Measure the mean on both sides of the streaks.
Failure: The technique fails when the difference between the mean of the streak and the background mean exceeds the corresponding limit value for that technique. Application: All images fall under the streak spec requirements. Failure Rate: It takes 100 streak free scans after the initial streak, to clear the streak failure. A repeat streak at the same location with 250 scans or less between streaks requires corrective action.
Streaks Caused by High Voltage Disturbances Definition: Same as for Streaks above, except that High Voltage disturbances cause these streaks, which result in missing DAS views. Often streaks of this origin occur in multiples, and appear to emanate from a common point. We refer to multiple streaks of this type as fan beam streaks. Method of Measurement: Use CD plot to look for missing views. A failure occurs when each group of 3 or fewer contiguous missing views creates streaks in the corresponding image. Application: All images fall under the Streaks Caused by High Voltage Disturbances spec requirements. Failure Rate: Run the Heat Soak/Seasoning on systems that fail either of the following specs: 48cm 120kv/400ma/1mm/1sec scans: Ten images may contain a total of one group of 1 to 3 contiguous missing views that cause streaks. All other techniques: One group of 1 to 3 contiguous missing views that cause streaks, allowed in 250 scans.
1038
Center Artifact Definition: A dark or light, well defined spot, 4 pixels in size, located in the center 16 pixels of the reconstruction circle. Method of measurement: Reference mean and standard deviation: Measure the mean and standard deviation of a 41 x 41 pixel box centered about X=256 and Y=256. Center Artifact Average (Ave.) The average of the 4 center pixel located at X (256,257) and Y (256,257) or the average of any four pixel square box which includes any of the four center pixels.
Failure: The technique fails when the difference between the Center Artifact Average and the Reference Mean exceeds the corresponding limit value for that technique. Application: 10mm 35/L 20/S 7mm 35/M 5mm 35/M 3mm 35/M 1mm 20/S
Failure Rate: 80% of all scans at a given technique must meet the spec. Center Spot Definition: A dark or light area, consisting of 3 to 25 pixels that has no defined edges, located near the center of reconstruction. Two types of failures can cause this artifact: Center Spot: Compare the mean of a 5x5 pixel box near the center to a 21x21 pixel box about the center. Max pixel requirement: A positive center spot places a maximum limit on the maximum value(s) allowed in the 5x5 pixel box.
Method of Measurement: Background mean: Measure the mean of a 21x21 pixel box centered at X=256, Y=256. Center spot mean: Measure the means of all 5x5 pixel boxes which include pixel X=256, Y=256 (25 5x5 boxes exist). Max Pixel value: Measure the most positive pixel in each of the 5x5 pixel boxes. Subtract the background mean from the center spot mean.
1039
Failure: The technique fails when the difference between the Center Artifact Average and the Reference Mean exceeds the corresponding limit value for that technique. 100kV and 140kV Failure: The center spot fails when the difference equals or exceeds 3.5 The center spot fails when the difference equals or falls below 3.5. The Max pixel fails when the difference equals or exceeds 1.8 and the Max Pixel value equals or exceeds 4.0.
120kV Failure: (5mm and 10mm only) The center spot fails when the difference equals or exceeds 3.2 The center spot fails when the difference equals or falls below 3.2. The Max pixel fails when the difference equals or exceeds 1.5 and the Max Pixel value equals or exceeds 4.0.
120kV failure: (1mm only) The Max pixel fails when the difference equals or exceeds 2.4 and the Max Pixel value equals or exceeds 6.4. No Center Spot for 1mm scans
80kV Failure: The center spot fails when the difference equals or exceeds 3.5 The center spot fails when the difference equals or falls below 3.5. No Max pixel for 80kV scans
Application:
10mm 12.5/S
7mm
5mm 12.5/S
3mm
1 mm
(Max Pixel Only)
12.5/S
Failure Rate: 90% of all scans at a given technique must meet the spec. Clump Definition: Light or dark areas of varying intensity, consisting of 3 or more contiguous pixels at the center of reconstructions Method of Measurement: Reference mean and Standard Deviation (Std. Dev.): Measure the mean and standard deviation of a 41x41 pixel box centered about X=256 and Y=256. Find all pixels in a 9x9 pixel box, centered about X=256, Y=256, that fall outside the limits of the reference mean plus/minus the value of the reference std. dev. times the limit number given for a technique.
1040
Failure: A failing clump consists of three or more pixels that touch, and exceed the limit on the same side of the reference mean (more positive or more negative) Application:
10mm 48/L 42/L
5mm 48/L 42/L
3mm 48/L 42/L
1mm
If at any technique, one of the above passes, consider that technique as having passed. Failure Rate: 80% of all scans at a given technique must meet the spec. Banding Definition: A dark or light circular area, greater than 3 pixels in width. The band may have less than 360 degrees of arc. Method of Measurement: Mean of band: Position two nonoverlapping boxes, approximately the width of the band, over the worst portion of the band. (Use one box when the band occurs near the center of the the image, and/or space is limited.) Use a square or rectangular box with an area of at least 50 pixels. The mean of the band equals the average of the box means.
Background mean: Measure the mean of a box inside the radius of the band, and the mean of a box outside the radius of the mean, on a radial through center of reconstruction. Use the average of the inside and outside means as the background mean. Use the same box size you used to measure the mean of the band. (Position both boxes on one side of the band, when the band occurs near the center of the the image, and/or space is limited.)
The image fails for band if the difference between the background mean and the mean of the band exceeds the corresponding spec limit for that technique. Application:
10mm 48/L 35/L 20/S 12.5/S
7mm 35/M
5mm 35/M 12.5/S
3mm 35/M
1mm 48/L 20/S
Radius* 024.0 015.8 017.5 08.5 05.1
* All location radii in cm.
1041
Failure Rate: 80% of all scans at a given technique must pass the band requirements.
Visual Acceptability In addition to the artifacts described in this appendix, review several techniques for visual acceptability. Manufacturing Staging reviews the 12.5/S scans and the Tommy (Adult Skull) Phantom for visual artifacts. 80% of all slices at a given technique must pass the corresponding visual artifact inspection. Repeating artifacts do not include artifacts that move or change color.
Phantom Replacement Verification This table explains what you should do if you have to replace a phantom, to verify that the new phantom is acceptable. Components 48 cm or 35 cm QA Task Scan two slices at: 120kV/200ma/10mm/4sec Verification Test Look for voids or hard spots in the images. Tomographic plane indication (internal lights only). Acquire QA scans for image quality checks.
Image Acceptance/Date:
_______________
Certified Image Reviewer: _______________ Image Acceptance/Date: _______________
Certified Image Reviewer: ________________
1042
APPENDIX 10F QCAL

Run the QCal procedure before you start to calibrate and scan. Note: The QCal function destroys all old phantom calibrations. Important: Observe the following: Turn ON DAS power at least 2 hours before the start of calibration Start QCal with a very cold tube. Do NOT take any exposures for at least one and one half hours before you start QCal. (This also means NO tube warmup). Complete tests that do not interfere with tube cooling during this wait. Make sure the mylar window centers on the patient alignment lights. An improperly centered mylar window could cause QCal to fail, because one of the mylar windows metal bands could shade the detector. Recommended: In order to increase the chance that the Image Series passes, repeat QCal if more than 96 hours have elapsed since you completed the last QCal.
Note:
QCal
1. Select |SERVICE|
Service
SYSTEM INTEGRATION 3. Select |Calibration|.
1043
4. Select |START|
. . . START. . .
5. Select Cal Types in order 1 Cold Qcal 2 Heat Qcal 3Hot Qcal
number of scans 40 scans 30 scans 40 scans
When to run QCal Note: Recommended: In order to increase the chance that the Image Series passes, repeat QCal if more than 96 hours have elapsed since you completed the last QCal. Run QCal any time you adjust or replace any of the following components. The original QCal remains valid until you: Adjust or replace the Collimator Replace the XRay tube Replace the Detector Move or replace one or more ADC Boards. Adjust Plane of Rotation (POR) Adjust Beam on Window (BOW) Adjust Isocenter
1044
APPENDIX 10G CALIBRATE CROSSTALK

1. Select |SERVICE|
Service
SYSTEM INTEGRATION 3. Select |Calibration|. 4. Select |START|
. . . START. . .
5. Select Cal Type 4 Xtalk Air
number of scans 4 scans
6. Reference the table to report the the table height to the Gantry Display. 7. Position the table as low as possible. 8. Adjust the phantom holder as high as possible, with respect to the table. 9. Place the Crosstalk phantom on the phantom holder, and use the alignment lights to center it. 10. Raise the table 180 mm from the centered position. 11. Acquire the Crosstalk phantom scans. 12. Select Cal Type 5 Xtalk Phantom number of scans 8 scans
1045
APPENDIX 10H GENERATE ALPHA VECTOR CAL

1. Select |SERVICE|
Service
SYSTEM INTEGRATION 3. Select |Calibration|. 4. Select |START|
. . . START. . .
5. Select |alpha vector|to open a Shelltool 6. Select Cal Types in order Note: 6 Afterglow number of scans 2 scans
Do NOT exit this program until the rotor comes down, so the software can calculate and install the afterglow vector. 7. When the rotor stops, select |Shutdown| to shut down the system.
Note:
Do NOT select the Log Out function at this time, as it may inadvertently delete software in the /usr/g directory. 8. Display the Toolchest Menu, and select |System Down|. 9. When shutdown completes, restart the system.
1046
APPENDIX 10I IMAGE TROUBLESHOOTING
Image Troubleshooting Use this flowchart when you troubleshoot image problems on a system with factory supplied calibration. This flowchart assumes you followed the Alignment and Calibration procedures in this manual.
Start
Rings in Image
Center Smudge Uniformity Cupping
Full Phantom Calibrations
90min Tube Cool Down (Brings XRay beam to a known state)
POR w/film BOW
QCAL
Air/Phantom Cals
Shoot Image Series
End
1047
NOTES
1048
CHAPTER 11 F4879X
111
Form F4879X (Total of Eleven pages) Record the system installation data on the following eleven pages of Form 4879. Keep any HHS data sheets sent from the factory with the F4879X data collected during the installation. Then keep in a safe place.
111
112
DATA RECORD FOR CT HISPEED ADVANTAGE

Where Installed City Customers Telephone Number System I.D. No. Operators Console (Master Control) Model Number System Gantry Model Number Dates of Tests Performed by Serial Number Serial Number State Room No.
Test Equipment Used (If Applicable) Name HV Bleeder Oscilloscope DMM

Traceability The Component Locator Installation Report has been completed and sent to the Product Locator File. Yes No
Manufacturer
Model Number
Serial Number
Calib. Due
Certified Component Changes Equipment Old Tube Casing Old Tube Insert New Tube Casing New Tube Insert Old Detector New Detector Old Collimator New Collimator Old Anode Tank New Anode Tank Old Cathode Tank New Cathode Tank
113
Model Number
Serial Number
Install Date
Exp. Ctr. Reading
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE CHECKS
Inst. Tube P.M. Det. Col. HV Tank
Procedure is required for those components listed (Not crossed out).

Inst. Tube P.M. Det.
mA METER CHECK
*HHS REQUIREMENT
Initials: _______________
Circuit ON A/D Range 15 25 15 25
Anode mA Cathode mA DVM A/D = Delta Compare Delta to Limits
mA METER VERIFICATION
*HHS REQUIREMENT
Initials: _______________
Circuit OFF DVM Anode KV Cathode KV Total KV Anode mA Cathode mA DVM A/D = Delta Compare Delta to Limits 0.0 0.0 0.0 A/D : : : Delta : : : Limits +/ 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 Anode KV Cathode KV Total KV Anode mA Cathode mA
Circuit ON DVM 50.0 50.0 100.0 A/D : : : Delta Limits+/ : : : 7.5 7.5 15.0 4.5 4.5
: Ignore these values at this time.
New Tube Seed Shift
Completed: -
114

Inst. Tube Det. Col.
HISPEED CT/i GENERAL SERVICE SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL DIRECTION 2152926100 Completed: -
Tube Z Axis Alignment (Formerly Tube Plane of Rotation, POR)
1. ZAlign Used:
Adjusted In Specification. (go to Detector ZAxis, step A)
OR
2. Tube Plane of Rotation (POR) using Film. Choose Tube Type: MX165CT 10 mm Aperture measurement spec 0 to 0.01 (0 to 0.25mm) 1.0 mm Aperture beam is visual (go to Detector ZAxis, step B or C) MX200 10 mm Aperture measurement spec 0 to +0.01 (0 to +0.25mm) 1.0 mm Aperture beam is visual (go to Detector ZAxis, step B or C)
Detector ZAxis (Formerly Beam On Window, BOW)
Completed: -
1. If ZAlign was used for Z Axis Alignment,then detector ZAxis will already be within specification. No additional adjustment will be necessary.
OR OR
2. Using Trapezoid Alignment Tool Beam on Window is within Spec.
3. Using Film Choose the correct tube type: MX165CT Three films are taken and the XRay Beam must be centered on the face of the Detector within the following specifications. Note that the Beam is offcentered on side of the Detector Window Center which is toward the Gantry. XF XR =+ 0.06 0.03 (+1.5mm 0.8mm) MX200 Three films are taken and the XRay Beam must be centered on the face of the Detector within the following specifications. Note that the Beam is offcentered on side of the Detector Window Center which is toward the Table. XF XR = 0.06 0.03 (1.5mm 0.8mm) Record XF Record XR Subtract 115 _________________ _________________ _________________ Record XF Record XR Subtract _________________ _________________ _________________
HISPEED CT/i GENERAL SERVICE SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL DIRECTION 2152926100 Completed: -

Inst. Tube Det. Col. Inst. Tube P.M. HV Det. Col. Tank Inst. Tube Det. Col. Inst. Tube Det. Col. Inst. Tube P.M.
Radial Alignment
Average Centroid at pin scan: Spec: 376.4 2 channels, if it is within limits, then no adjustment is needed.
Tube Signal/Noise Output Check
Completed: -
Isocenter
Completed: -
Avg. of Large and Small Focal Spots: Spec: 373.75 0.02
Center Body Filter (CBF)
Completed: -
Adjust CBF Value: Spec: 373.75 0.2
VERIFICATION OF HV TANK FEEDBACK RESISTORS
*HHS REQUIREMENT
HV Tank
(Formerly, Calibration of HV Tank Feedback Resistors)
Initials: _______________ Verification of total kV % Deviation 1%
1. Using KV Test (Only if KV test baseline available) fill in chart: Nominal kV 100 Expected
Measured
OR
2. Using HV Divider and Oscilloscope Anode and Cathode Technic 100/50L Technic 100/50L Anode Divider Displayed Anode = delta KV Cathode Divider Displayed Cathode = delta KV Compare delta KVs to limits. Cathode Divider Displayed Cathode KV Delta KV Anode Divider Displayed Anode KV Delta KV Limits +/ KV 0.5 Limits +/ KV 0.5
116
Anode and Cathode computer displayed readings have a limit of 50.0 +/ 0.5 KV. Total KV Technic 100/50L (Cathode & Anode Divider) Displayed Total KV = delta KV Compare delta KV to limits KV Meter Verification Circuit OFF DVM Anode KV Cathode KV Total KV Anode mA Cathode mA 0.0 0.0 0.0 : : : : : : A/D Delta Limits +/ 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 Anode KV Cathode KV Total KV Anode mA Cathode mA Circuit ON DVM 50.0 50.0 100.0 : : : : : : A/D Delta Limits+/ 7.5 7.5 15.0 4.5 4.5 Cathode and Anode Divider Displayed Total KV Delta KV Limits +/ KV 1.5
DVM A/D = Delta Compare Delta to Limits
: Ignore these values at this time.
Inst. Tube P.M.
Auto mA Cal
Completed: -
Det. Col. HV Tank
117

KV 80 100 120 140
KV and mA VERIFICATION DATA SHEET
* HHS REQUIREMENT
Data sheet complete and meets specification (attach print out/film from system if available) SMALL FOCAL SPOT TECHNIC At 5ms mA 40 70 100 150 200 300 40 70 100 150 200 240 40 70 100 150 200 40 70 100 130 170 KV mA Spec Limits for mA at 5ms 3444 5977 85110 128165 170220 255330 3444 5977 85110 128165 170220 204264 3444 5977 85110 128165 170220 3444 5977 85110 110143 144187 Cathode KV mA Anode KV mA
Initials: _________________
Spec Limits for Total KV Total KV 78.481.6 78.481.6 78.481.6 78.481.6 78.481.6 78.481.6 98102 98102 98102 98102 98102 98102 117.6122.4 117.6122.4 117.6122.4 117.6122.4 117.6122.4 137.2142.8 137.2142.8 137.2142.8 137.2142.8 137.2142.8 Cathode mA 36.243.8 65.674.4 95.0105 144156 193207 291309 36.243.8 65.674.4 95.0105 144156 193207 232.2247.8 36.243.8 65.674.4 95.0105 114156 193207 36.243.8 65.674.4 95.0105 124.4135.6 163.6176.4
Since the MX200 tube uses a metal / ceramic frame, some of the electrons hitting the target actually bounce off and are captured by the frame. This causes a frame current and the resultant measured anode mA is slightly less than the cathode mA. Typically this difference is between 5 & 10%. The cathode mA is the true indicator of radiation output. Because of this difference, the CT/i system has been changed to control cathode mA rather than anode mA, as originally designed.
118

KV 80 100 ## ## 120 140
KV and mA VERIFICATION DATA SHEET (CONTINUED)
* HHS REQUIREMENT
Data sheet complete and meets specification (attach print out/film from system if available) LARGE FOCAL SPOT TECHNIC At 5ms mA 40 70 100 200 300 400 40 70 100 200 300 400 420 40 70 100 200 300 400 40 70 100 200 300 340 KV mA Spec Limits for mA at 5ms 3444 5977 85110 170220 255330 340440 3444 5977 85110 170220 255330 340440 357462 3444 5977 85110 170220 255330 340440 3444 5977 85110 170220 255330 289374 Cathode KV mA Anode KV mA
Initials: _________________
Spec Limits for Total KV Total KV 78.481.6 78.481.6 78.481.6 78.481.6 78.481.6 78.481.6 98102 98102 98102 98102 98102 98102 98102 117.6122.4 117.6122.4 117.6122.4 117.6122.4 117.6122.4 117.6122.4 137.2142.8 137.2142.8 137.2142.8 137.2142.8 137.2142.8 137.2142.8 Cathode mA 36.243.8 65.674.4 95.0105 193207 291309 389411 36.243.8 65.674.4 95.0105 193207 291309 389411 408432 36.243.8 65.674.4 95.0105 193207 291309 389411 36.243.8 65.674.4 95.0105 193207 291309 330.2349.8
## Note: 100kV, 400mA is used as the test point for MX165 tube, the MX200 tube uses 100kV, 420mA.
119

Inst. Tube P.M.
RISE AND FALL TIMES
* HHS REQUIREMENT
Initials: _________________
Technic KV 80 140 mA 400 40 Rise Delay ms Limit 0 +1.9ms Not Applicable Fall Delay ms Not Applicable 0 +2ms Limit

Inst. Tube P.M.
VERIFICATION OF INTERNAL SCAN TIMER
* HHS REQUIREMENT
Initials: _________________
Technic mA 40 Oscilloscope Exposure Duration Limit 0.961.04 sec Displayed Exposure Duration Limit 0.991.02 sec
KV
100

Inst. Tube P.M.
EXPOSURE TIME ACCURACY
* HHS REQUIREMENT
Initials:
_________________
Scout Scans Technic Distance 20 mm 150 mm 600 mm Axial Scans Technic Time 0.6 Large FOV 1.0 4.0 Helical Scan Technic Duration 30 sec Displayed Exposure Duration Limit 28.8 31.2 Displayed Exposure Duration Limit 0.605 0.655 0.960 1.04 3.84 4.16 Displayed Exposure Duration Limit 0.258 0.278 1.98 2.04 7.920 8.095
1110

Inst. Tube P.M. Inst. Tube P.M.
OPERATOR INDICATORS
* HHS REQUIREMENT
Initials: _________________
XRay Indicators on Front and Back of Gantry Illuminate During XRay XRAY BEAM LOCATION
* HHS REQUIREMENT
Initials: _________________
Tomo Plane Indication Accuracy Refer to system service manual and verify that the relationship of the alignment lights to the xray beam is compliant.
S S S
Internal Lights (1mm) External Lights (1mm) All align. lights are visible with room lights at max. settings.
IMAGE PERFORMANCE

HV Tank
ZAxis Correction (Formerly QCAL)
Completed: -
1. If ZAlign was used for Z Axis Alignment: No QCAL is necessary. (go to Image Calibration, step A)
OR
2. QCAL completed In Specification. Adjusted In Specification. (go to Image Calibration, step B)

HV Tank
Image Calibration
Completed: -
1. If ZAlign was used for Z Axis Alignment:
Only Air Calibrations are necessary.
OR
2. Air and Phantom Calibrations completed and N Number adjustment completed.
The Number of Phantom Cals will vary depending on Site Specific scanning protocols.
1111

Inst. Tube
HV Det. Col. Tank
IMAGE QUALITY CHECK
*HHS REQUIREMENT
Initials: _________________
48cm Large Peristaltic On

Scan at maximum 120 KV technique, one of either: 48cm/LargeSFOV/120/400/10/4sec/1slice 48cm/LargeSFOV/120/300/10/4sec/1slice Visual inspection for Rings and bands. Cupping per chart below. Visual results acceptable?.......................................................Yes: ROI box size: 45 x 45 pixels at locations: 255, 255 255, 59 255, 451 451, 255 59, 255
AvXo
Xc
AvXo Xc less than 8.5 cts
AvSDo
less than 14.0@400mA less than 16.2@300mA
MTF Peristaltic On
Small Focal Spot (120kv/170ma/2sec) (4 slice average) Large Focal Spot (120kv/340ma/1sec) (4 slice average) 0.68 __________ 1.00 0.65 __________ 1.00
RO3 (
RO3 )
2 1 / ) ( #
CE2723
Contrast Scale = mean of Bmean of C.

RO3 #
SD# = SD of ROI Box over F slits. SDBGe= (SD(+ SC)) /2 Modulation = SD A

2
SD ave
MTF = 2.2 (Modulation/Contrast Scale)
Unusual Aliasing, Other Artifacts

Visual inspection for unusual aliasing, and other artifacts. (QA#1 (bars)/Small SFOV/120kv/170ma/10mm/2sec/1slice Visual results acceptable?.......................................................Yes: -
1112
CT Number Check, Noise Check, Cupping Check

Visual inspection for Rings and bands. Cupping per chart below. QA#3 (water)/Small SFOV/120/170/10/2sec/1slice Visual results acceptable?.......................................................Yes: ROI box size: 45 x 45 pixels at locations: 255, 255 255, 59 255, 451 451, 255 59, 255
AvXo
Xc 0.0 1.5 cts
AvXo Xc less than 2.0 cts
SDc greater than 3.00 less than 3.60(3.80)*
*If the tube has > 5000 scans on it, the upper standard deviation spec is 3.80, rather than 3.60.
CT Number Check Medium*

* Not applicable for RP
Check CT# at center. QA#3 (water)/Medium* SFOV/120/170/10/2sec/1 slice/25cm DFOV ROI box size: 14cm x 14cm at locations: 255, 255
Xc 0.0 1.5
CT Number Check Large

Check CT# at center. QA#3 (water)/Large SFOV/120/170/10/2sec/1 slice/25cm DFOV ROI box size: 14cm x 14cm pixels at locations: 255, 255
Xc 0.0 1.5

Inst. Tube
Heat Soak / Seasoning
Completed: -
COLLIMATOR CHANGE required test data Z axis detector alignment Polaroid Form 2579 submit immediately
1113
1114
GE Medical Systems: Telex 3797371 P.O. Box 414, Milwaukee, Wisconsin 53201 U.S.A. (Asia, Pacific, Latin America, North America) GE Medical Systems Europe: Telex 698626 283, rue de la Minire, B.P.34, 78533 Buc Cedex, France

Ge Cti Install

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Ge Cti Install

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Technical Publications

GE Medical Systems HISPEED CT/i GENERAL SERVICE SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL

CopyrightE 1998 by General Electric Company

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HISPEED CT/i GENERAL SERVICE SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL DIRECTION 2152926100

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HISPEED CT/i GENERAL SERVICE SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL DIRECTION 2152926100

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HISPEED CT/i GENERAL SERVICE SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL DIRECTION 2152926100

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HISPEED CT/i GENERAL SERVICE SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL DIRECTION 2152926100

IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION

CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 NOTES

HISPEED CT/i GENERAL SERVICE SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL DIRECTION 2152926100

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HISPEED CT/i GENERAL SERVICE SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL DIRECTION 2152926100

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HISPEED CT/i GENERAL SERVICE SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL DIRECTION 2152926100

Integration and Image Series

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HISPEED CT/i GENERAL SERVICE SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL DIRECTION 2152926100

CHAPTER 2 Install Power, Ground and Interconnect Cables . . . . . . . . . . . .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HISPEED CT/i GENERAL SERVICE SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL DIRECTION 2152926100

TABLE OF CONTENTS continued

CHAPTER 3 System Continuity and Ground Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CHAPTER 4 PDU Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HISPEED CT/i GENERAL SERVICE SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL DIRECTION 2152926100

TABLE OF CONTENTS continued

CHAPTER 5 Computer Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HISPEED CT/i GENERAL SERVICE SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL DIRECTION 2152926100

TABLE OF CONTENTS continued

CHAPTER 6 Table/Gantry Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CHAPTER 7 DAS Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HISPEED CT/i GENERAL SERVICE SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL DIRECTION 2152926100

TABLE OF CONTENTS continued

CHAPTER 9 System Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HISPEED CT/i GENERAL SERVICE SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL DIRECTION 2152926100

TABLE OF CONTENTS continued

Form F4879X (Total Eleven pages) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HISPEED CT/i GENERAL SERVICE SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL DIRECTION 2152926100

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HISPEED CT/i GENERAL SERVICE SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL DIRECTION 2152926100

TABLE OF ILLUSTRATIONS continued

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HISPEED CT/i GENERAL SERVICE SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL DIRECTION 2152926100

TABLE OF ILLUSTRATIONS continued

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HISPEED CT/i GENERAL SERVICE SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL DIRECTION 2152926100

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HISPEED CT/i GENERAL SERVICE SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL DIRECTION 2152926100

CHAPTER 1 POSITION SUBSYSTEMS

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HISPEED CT/i GENERAL SERVICE SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL DIRECTION 2152926100

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HISPEED CT/i GENERAL SERVICE SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL DIRECTION 2152926100

0100 Nm (0100 ftlbs)